[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025095641A1 - Method performed by terminal or base station in wireless communication system, and device therefor - Google Patents

Method performed by terminal or base station in wireless communication system, and device therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025095641A1
WO2025095641A1 PCT/KR2024/016952 KR2024016952W WO2025095641A1 WO 2025095641 A1 WO2025095641 A1 WO 2025095641A1 KR 2024016952 W KR2024016952 W KR 2024016952W WO 2025095641 A1 WO2025095641 A1 WO 2025095641A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
slot
srs
terminal
value
scs
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/KR2024/016952
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
최민우
황승계
심재남
고현수
양석철
김선욱
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
LG Electronics Inc
Original Assignee
LG Electronics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by LG Electronics Inc filed Critical LG Electronics Inc
Publication of WO2025095641A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025095641A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H04W72/231Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the layers above the physical layer, e.g. RRC or MAC-CE signalling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02Terminal devices

Definitions

  • This specification relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method for transmitting or receiving uplink/downlink signals by a terminal or a base station in a wireless communication system, and a device therefor.
  • Wireless communication systems are being widely deployed to provide various types of communication services such as voice and data.
  • wireless communication systems are multiple access systems that can support communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • multiple access systems include CDMA (code division multiple access) systems, FDMA (frequency division multiple access) systems, TDMA (time division multiple access) systems, OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) systems, and SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) systems.
  • a TA command for adjusting TA (timing advance) for UL timing synchronization of the terminal can be provided to the terminal from the network, and in this case, the terminal determines the slot to which the TA command is to be applied based on the smallest SCS (subcarrier spacing) among the configured UL BWPs.
  • the technical problem to be achieved is to provide a method and a device for transmitting or receiving a signal more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system. For example, a method and device for ensuring positioning accuracy and resolving the ambiguity problem of TA application in a situation where SRS transmitted by hopping frequencies for positioning overlaps with TA command application can be provided.
  • a method performed by a terminal comprises: receiving a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal from a network; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein, based on the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value being included in a transmission interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted while frequency hopping for positioning, the terminal starts applying the adjusted TA value from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the transmission interval of the SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.
  • the terminal can receive SRS configuration information including information on SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.
  • the above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.
  • the terminal can transmit the SRS by frequency hopping in the above transmission section.
  • the same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being transmitted.
  • the above TA command can be received via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).
  • RAR random access response
  • MAC medium access control
  • the above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.
  • a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described above may be provided.
  • a device includes a memory configured to store instructions; and a processor configured to perform operations by executing the instructions, wherein the operations of the processor include: receiving a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the device from a network; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein the device starts applying the adjusted TA value from a second slot located after the first slot based on the first slot being included in a transmission period of an SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted while hopping frequencies for positioning, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the transmission period of the SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the above device may be a processing device for controlling a terminal operating in a wireless communication system.
  • the above device may further include a transceiver.
  • a method performed by a base station includes transmitting, to a terminal, a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein, based on whether the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value is included in a reception interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) received while frequency hopping for positioning, application of the adjusted TA value starts from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the reception interval of the SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described above may be provided.
  • a base station includes a memory configured to store commands; and a processor configured to perform operations by executing the commands, wherein the operations of the processor include: transmitting, to the terminal, a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value is included in a reception interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) received while hopping frequencies for positioning, and application of the adjusted TA value starts from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the reception interval of the SRS.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a signal can be transmitted or received more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system. For example, in a situation where SRS transmitted by hopping frequencies for positioning overlaps with TA command application, positioning accuracy can be ensured and the ambiguity problem of TA application can be resolved by postponing the application of the TA command.
  • Figure 1 illustrates physical channels used in a 3GPP system, which is an example of a wireless communication system, and a general signal transmission method using the channels.
  • Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of positioning protocol settings.
  • Figure 9 is a diagram showing an example of Multi RTT.
  • Figure 11 illustrates the procedure of terminal operation for performing positioning measurement.
  • Figure 12 illustrates various ISAC environments.
  • Figures 13 and 14 are examples of 3GPP wireless communication systems supporting ISAC.
  • Figure 15 illustrates an example of SRS transmission for TA command reception/application and positioning.
  • Figure 16 illustrates an example of postponing the application of TA from the first slot to the second slot based on SRS transmission for positioning.
  • Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining the operation of a terminal and a network according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a terminal according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a base station according to one embodiment.
  • Figures 20 to 23 illustrate a communication system (1) and a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure.
  • UTRA is a part of UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System).
  • 3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project) LTE(long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS(Evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA, and LTE-A(Advanced) is an evolved version of 3GPP LTE.
  • 3GPP NR(New Radio or New Radio Access Technology) is an evolved version of 3GPP LTE/LTE-A.
  • the term 'base station' used in this specification can be replaced with terms such as fixed station, Node B, gNode B (gNB), Access Point (AP), cell, or transmission and reception point (TRP).
  • the term 'relay' can be replaced with terms such as Relay Node (RN), Relay Station, etc.
  • the term 'terminal' can be replaced with terms such as User Equipment (UE), Mobile Station (MS), Mobile Subscriber Station (MSS), Subscriber Station (SS).
  • UE User Equipment
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • - PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • - PSCell Primary SCG (Secondary Cell Group) Cell
  • a terminal receives information from a base station through a downlink (DL), and the terminal transmits information to the base station through an uplink (UL).
  • the information transmitted and received by the base station and the terminal includes data and various control information, and various physical channels exist depending on the type/purpose of the information they transmit and receive.
  • Figure 1 is a drawing for explaining physical channels used in a 3GPP NR system and a general signal transmission method using them.
  • the terminal When a terminal is powered on again from a powered-off state or enters a new cell, the terminal performs an initial cell search operation such as synchronizing with the base station in step S101. To this end, the terminal receives a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB) from the base station.
  • the SSB includes a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH).
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • the terminal synchronizes with the base station based on the PSS/SSS and obtains information such as a cell ID. In addition, the terminal can obtain broadcast information within the cell based on the PBCH. Meanwhile, the terminal can receive a Downlink Reference Signal (DL RS) in the initial cell search step to check the downlink channel status.
  • DL RS Downlink Reference Signal
  • the terminal can obtain more specific system information by receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) according to physical downlink control channel information in step S102.
  • a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH)
  • a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH)
  • the terminal may perform a random access procedure such as steps S103 to S106 to complete connection to the base station.
  • the terminal may transmit a preamble through a physical random access channel (PRACH) (S103) and receive a response message to the preamble through a physical downlink control channel and a physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto (S104).
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • S104 receives a response message to the preamble through a physical downlink control channel and a physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto
  • S104 physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto
  • a contention resolution procedure such as transmission of an additional physical random access channel (S105) and reception of a physical downlink control channel and a physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto (S106) may be performed.
  • a terminal that has performed the procedure as described above can then perform physical downlink control channel/physical downlink shared channel reception (S107) and physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)/physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission (S108) as general uplink/downlink signal transmission procedures.
  • Control information that the terminal transmits to the base station is collectively referred to as uplink control information (UCI).
  • UCI includes HARQ ACK/NACK (Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgement/Negative-ACK), SR (Scheduling Request), CSI (Channel State Information), etc.
  • CSI includes CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI (Rank Indication), etc.
  • UCI is generally transmitted through PUCCH, but can be transmitted through PUSCH when control information and traffic data must be transmitted simultaneously. Additionally, UCI can be transmitted aperiodically via PUSCH upon request/instruction from the network.
  • FIG. 2 illustrates the structure of a radio frame.
  • uplink and downlink transmissions are organized into frames.
  • Each radio frame has a length of 10 ms and is divided into two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF).
  • Each half-frame is divided into five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF).
  • a subframe is divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe depends on Subcarrier Spacing (SCS).
  • SCS Subcarrier Spacing
  • Each slot contains 12 or 14 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbols depending on a CP (cyclic prefix). When a normal CP is used, each slot contains 14 OFDM symbols. When an extended CP is used, each slot contains 12 OFDM symbols.
  • OFDM numerologies may be set differently between multiple cells merged into one terminal. Accordingly, (absolute time) sections of time resources (e.g., SF, slot or TTI) (conveniently referred to as TU (Time Unit)) consisting of the same number of symbols may be set differently between the merged cells.
  • the symbols may include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA symbols (or Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM, DFT-s-OFDM symbols).
  • Fig. 3 illustrates a resource grid of a slot.
  • a slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal CP, one slot includes 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot includes 12 symbols.
  • a carrier includes multiple subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • An RB Resource Block
  • a BWP Bandwidth Part
  • a carrier can include up to N (e.g., 5) BWPs. Data communication is performed through activated BWPs, and only one BWP can be activated for one terminal.
  • Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a Resource Element (RE), and one complex symbol can be mapped to it.
  • RE Resource Element
  • Fig. 4 illustrates an example of mapping physical channels within a slot.
  • a frame is characterized by a self-contained structure in which a DL control channel, DL or UL data, and UL control channels can all be included within one slot.
  • the first N symbols within a slot can be used to transmit a DL control channel (e.g., PDCCH) (hereinafter, referred to as a DL control region), and the last M symbols within a slot can be used to transmit a UL control channel (e.g., PUCCH) (hereinafter, referred to as a UL control region).
  • N and M are each integers greater than or equal to 0.
  • a resource region (hereinafter, referred to as a data region) between the DL control region and the UL control region can be used to transmit DL data (e.g., PDSCH) or UL data (e.g., PUSCH).
  • GP provides a time gap during the process in which a base station and a terminal switch from a transmission mode to a reception mode or from a reception mode to a transmission mode. Some symbols at the time of switching from DL to UL within a subframe can be set as GP.
  • the PDCCH carries DCI (Downlink Control Information).
  • the PCCCH i.e., DCI
  • the PCCCH carries the transmission format and resource allocation of the DL-SCH (downlink shared channel), resource allocation information for the UL-SCH (uplink shared channel), paging information for the PCH (paging channel), system information on the DL-SCH, resource allocation information for upper layer control messages such as random access response transmitted on the PDSCH, transmission power control commands, activation/release of Configured Scheduling (CS), etc.
  • the DCI includes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and the CRC is masked/scrambled with various identifiers (e.g., Radio Network Temporary Identifier, RNTI) depending on the owner or usage of the PDCCH. For example, if the PDCCH is for a specific terminal, the CRC is masked with a terminal identifier (e.g., Cell-RNTI, C-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for paging, the CRC is masked with the Paging-RNTI (P-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for system information (e.g., System Information Block, SIB), the CRC is masked with the System Information RNTI (SI-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for random access response, the CRC is masked with the Random Access-RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • Fig. 5 illustrates a process of receiving PDSCH and transmitting ACK/NACK.
  • a UE can detect a PDCCH in slot #n.
  • the PDCCH includes downlink scheduling information (e.g., DCI format 1_0, 1_1), and the PDCCH indicates a DL assignment-to-PDSCH offset (K0) and a PDSCH-HARQ-ACK reporting offset (K1).
  • the UE receives a PDSCH from slot #(n+K0) according to the scheduling information of slot #n, and then, when reception of the PDSCH is finished in slot #n1 (where, n+K0 ⁇ n1), the UE can transmit a UCI through PUCCH in slot #(n1+K1).
  • the UCI can include a HARQ-ACK response to the PDSCH. If the PDSCH is configured to transmit up to 1 TB, the HARQ-ACK response can be configured with 1 bit. When PDSCH is configured to transmit up to 2 TB, HARQ-ACK response may consist of 2 bits if spatial bundling is not configured, and 1 bit if spatial bundling is configured. When HARQ-ACK transmission timing for multiple PDSCHs is designated as slot #(n+K1), UCI transmitted in slot #(n+K1) includes HARQ-ACK responses for multiple PDSCHs.
  • Figure 6 illustrates a PUSCH transmission process.
  • a terminal can detect a PDCCH in slot #n.
  • the PDCCH includes uplink scheduling information (e.g., DCI format 0_0, 0_1).
  • the terminal can transmit a PUSCH in slot #(n+K2) according to the scheduling information of slot #n.
  • the PUSCH includes a UL-SCH TB.
  • a terminal for this purpose can be defined as a (NR) RedCap (reduced capability) UE/device.
  • NR RedCap
  • a general NR terminal that supports all or one or more of the 5G main use cases, distinct from a RedCap device can be defined as a NR (normal) UE/device or a non-RedCap UE/device.
  • Redcap UE may be a terminal that intentionally reduces some of the 5G key capabilities (peak data rate, user experience data rate, latency, mobility, connection density, energy efficiency, spectral efficiency, and regional traffic efficiency) defined in IMT-2020 in order to achieve all or part of the low device cost/complexity, low power consumption, and small form factor.
  • 5G key capabilities peak data rate, user experience data rate, latency, mobility, connection density, energy efficiency, spectral efficiency, and regional traffic efficiency
  • Redcap use cases can include, for example:
  • Sensors and actuators can be connected to 5G networks and cores.
  • IWSN industrial wireless sensor networks
  • LTE-M/NB-IOT Low Power Wide Area
  • Devices in this environment include: pressure sensors, humidity sensors, thermometers, motion sensors, accelerometers, actuators, etc.
  • the smart city vertical involves data collection and processing to more efficiently monitor and control urban resources and provide services to city residents.
  • surveillance camera deployment is an essential part of smart cities as well as factories and industrial sites.
  • - Wearable use cases may include smart watches, rings, eHealth-related devices, medical monitoring devices, etc.
  • One characteristic of the use cases is the small size of the devices.
  • SRS is a UL reference signal transmitted by the terminal and received by the base station.
  • the base station can perform link adaptation, DL channel estimation using channel reciprocity characteristics, UL beam management, UL precoding, and/or UL measurement.
  • the terminal can receive SRS configuration information (e.g., TS38.331 SRS-Config IE) provided by the base station and determine parameters for SRS transmission based on the information.
  • SRS configuration consists of a list of SRS-Resources, SRS-PosResources, SRS-ResourceSets, and SRS-PosResourcesets, where SRS-ResourceSets and SRS-PosResourcesets each include a set of SRS-Resources and SRS-PosResources.
  • SRS can be divided into three resource types depending on the setting and transmission method of time resources.
  • the terminal determines the location where the SRS resource is transmitted based on the configured period and offset of the SRS resource set by RRC, and if configured, transmits the SRS periodically without separate signaling.
  • the terminal determines the location where the SRS resource is transmitted based on the configured period and offset of the SRS resource set by RRC, and then starts periodic transmission of the indicated SRS if the transmission of the SRS is activated by MAC CE. If deactivated by MAC CE, the terminal stops transmitting the SRS.
  • the terminal For SRS with the resource type set to aperiodic, the terminal transmits the indicated SRS by reflecting the position of the offset set by RRC based on the time of reception of DCI indicating triggering for the corresponding SRS resource set.
  • Positioning may mean determining a geographic location and/or velocity of a user equipment (UE) by measuring radio signals.
  • the position information may be requested by a client (e.g., an application) associated with the UE and reported to the client. Additionally, the position information may be included in a core network or may be requested by a client connected to the core network.
  • the position information may be reported in a standard format, such as cell-based or geographic coordinates, and in this case, an estimated error value for the position and velocity of the UE and/or a positioning method used for positioning may be reported together.
  • Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of a positioning protocol configuration for measuring the position of a terminal.
  • LPP can be used as a point-to-point between a location server (E-SMLC and/or SLP and/or LMF) and a target device to position the target device (UE and/or SET) using position-related measurements acquired from one or more reference sources.
  • a location server E-SMLC and/or SLP and/or LMF
  • UE and/or SET position-related measurements acquired from one or more reference sources.
  • the target device and the location server can exchange measurement and/or location information based on Signal A and/or Signal B.
  • NRPPa can be used to exchange information between a reference source (ACCESS NODE and/or BS and/or TP and/or NG-RAN node) and a location server.
  • a reference source ACCESS NODE and/or BS and/or TP and/or NG-RAN node
  • Functions provided by the NRPPa protocol may include:
  • This function allows location information to be exchanged between the reference source and the LMF for E-CID positioning purposes.
  • This function allows information to be exchanged between the reference source and the LMF for OTDOA positioning purposes.
  • the positioning methods supported by NG-RAN may include GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), OTDOA, E-CID (enhanced cell ID), barometric sensor positioning, WLAN positioning, Bluetooth positioning, and terrestrial beacon system (TBS), UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival), etc.
  • GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
  • OTDOA enhanced cell ID
  • E-CID enhanced cell ID
  • barometric sensor positioning WLAN positioning
  • Bluetooth positioning Bluetooth positioning
  • TBS terrestrial beacon system
  • UTDOA Uplink Time Difference of Arrival
  • the position of the UE may be measured using any one of the positioning methods, but the position of the UE may also be measured using two or more positioning methods.
  • Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of an OTDOA (observed time difference of arrival) positioning method.
  • the OTDOA positioning method uses the timing of measurements of downlink signals received from multiple TPs, including eNB, ng-eNB, and PRS-only TPs.
  • the UE measures the timing of the received downlink signals using location assistance data received from a location server. Based on these measurement results and the geographical coordinates of neighboring TPs, the location of the UE can be determined.
  • a UE connected to a gNB can request a measurement gap for OTDOA measurements from a TP. If the UE is not aware of an SFN for at least one TP in the OTDOA assistance data, the UE can use an autonomous gap to obtain the SFN of the OTDOA reference cell before requesting a measurement gap to perform Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD) measurements.
  • RSTD Reference Signal Time Difference
  • RSTD can be defined based on the smallest relative time difference between the boundaries of two subframes received from the reference cell and the measurement cell, respectively. That is, it can be calculated based on the relative time difference between the start time of the subframe of the reference cell that is closest to the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. Meanwhile, the reference cell can be selected by the UE.
  • TOA time of arrival
  • TP 1, TP 2, and TP 3 are measured respectively, and RSTD for TP 1-TP 2, RSTD for TP 2-TP 3, and RSTD for TP 3-TP 1 are calculated based on the three TOAs, and a geometric hyperbola is determined based on these, and the point where these hyperbolas intersect can be estimated as the position of the UE.
  • the estimated position of the UE may be known within a certain range according to the measurement uncertainty.
  • E-CID Enhanced Cell ID
  • the location of the UE can be measured through geographic information of the serving ng-eNB, serving gNB, and/or serving cell of the UE.
  • the geographic information of the serving ng-eNB, serving gNB, and/or serving cell can be obtained through paging, registration, etc.
  • the E-CID positioning method may utilize additional UE measurements and/or NG-RAN radio resources, in addition to the CID positioning method, to improve the UE position estimation.
  • some of the same measurement methods as the measurement control system of the RRC protocol may be used, but generally, additional measurements are not performed only for position measurement of the UE.
  • a separate measurement configuration or measurement control message may not be provided to measure the position of the UE, and the UE also does not expect to be requested to perform additional measurement operations only for position measurement, and may report measurement values acquired through measurement methods that the UE can generally measure.
  • a serving gNB can implement an E-CID location method using E-UTRA measurements provided from the UE.
  • measurement elements that can be used for E-CID positioning include:
  • E-UTRA RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • E-UTRA RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time difference GERAN/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication)
  • UTRAN CPICH Common Pilot Channel
  • RSCP Receiveived Signal Code Power
  • T ADV can be divided into Type 1 and Type 2 as follows.
  • T ADV Type 1 (ng-eNB Rx-Tx Time Difference)+(UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time Difference)
  • T ADV Type 2 ng-eNB receive-transmit time difference
  • AoA can be used to measure the direction of the UE.
  • AoA can be defined as an estimated angle for the position of the UE in a counterclockwise direction from the base station/TP.
  • the geographical reference direction can be north.
  • the base station/TP can use an uplink signal such as a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) and/or a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) for AoA measurement.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • the larger the array of antenna arrays the higher the measurement accuracy of AoA, and when the antenna arrays are arranged at equal intervals, the signals received from adjacent antenna elements can have a constant phase change (Phase-Rotate).
  • UTDOA is a method to determine the location of a UE by estimating the arrival time of an SRS.
  • the serving cell is used as a reference cell, and the location of the UE can be estimated through the difference in arrival times with other cells (or base stations/TPs).
  • the E-SMLC can indicate the serving cell of the target UE to instruct the target UE to transmit SRS.
  • the E-SMLC can provide configurations such as whether the SRS is periodic/aperiodic, bandwidth, and frequency/group/sequence hopping.
  • Figure 9 is a diagram showing an example of a Multi RTT (round trip time) positioning method.
  • an RTT process is illustrated in which a TOA measurement is performed by an initiating device and a responding device, and the responding device provides the TOA measurement to the initiating device for RTT measurement (calculation).
  • the initiating device may be a TRP and/or a terminal
  • the responding device may be a terminal and/or a TRP.
  • the initiating device transmits an RTT measurement request, and the responding device can receive it (1301).
  • the initiating device can transmit the RTT measurement signal at t 0 , and the responding device can obtain the TOA measurement t 1 (1303).
  • the responding device can transmit the RTT measurement signal at t 2 , and the initiating device can obtain the TOA measurement t 3 (1305).
  • the responding device can transmit information about [t 2 -t 1 ], and the initiating device can receive the information and calculate the RTT (1307).
  • the information can be transmitted and received based on a separate signal, or can be transmitted and received while being included in the RTT measurement signal (1305).
  • the RTT can correspond to a double-range measurement between two devices. Positioning estimation can be performed from the information. Based on the measured RTT, d 1 , d 2 , and d 3 can be determined, and the target device location can be determined as the intersection of circles centered at each of BS 1 , BS 2 , and BS 3 (or TRP) and having each of d 1 , d 2 , and d 3 as a radius.
  • Figure 10 illustrates the positioning structure of a next generation (NG) RAN (radio access network).
  • the NR RAN may be referred to as NR RAN or 5G RAN.
  • the AMF may receive a request for some location services related to a particular target UE from another entity (e.g., a GMLC or a UE) or the AMF itself may decide to initiate some location services on behalf of a particular target UE (e.g., in case of an IMS emergency call).
  • the AMF may then send a location service request to the LMF.
  • the LMF may process the location service request, and the processing of the location service request may include sending assistance data to the target UE for UE-based and/or UE-assisted positioning and/or positioning of the target UE.
  • the LMF sends the location service result (e.g., a position estimate for the UE) to the AMF.
  • the AMF For location services requested by an entity other than the AMF (e.g., a GMLC or a UE), the AMF sends the location service result to that entity.
  • NG-RAN nodes can control TRPs/TPs such as RRM or DL-PRS only TP to support PRS-based TBS.
  • LMF can be connected to E-SMLCt to access UTRAN information.
  • LMF can be connected to SLP, which is responsible for positioning with respect to the user plane.
  • Figure 11 illustrates an example of location services supported by NG-RAN.
  • AMF When AMF receives a Location Service Request while UE is in CM-IDLE state, AMF performs a network triggered service request to establish signaling for connection with UE and allocation of specific serving gNB/ng-eNB. In Fig. 11, it is assumed that UE is in connected mode.
  • a location service request for the UE may be triggered, and the location service request for the UE may be any one of 1101, 1102 or 1103.
  • an entity of 5GC e.g., GMLC
  • some location service e.g., positioning
  • the serving AMF may trigger some location service (e.g., to locate the UE for an emergency call) for the target UE itself (1102)
  • some location service e.g., positioning or assistance data forwarding
  • AMF forwards the location service request to LMF (1104).
  • LMF provides services to NG-RAN to obtain location measurement or assistance data and initiates a positioning procedure with nearby ng-eNB/gNB (1105).
  • the LMF initiates a positioning procedure with the UE to obtain a position estimate or positioning measurement or to transmit position assistance data to the UE (1106).
  • the LMF provides a location service response to the AMF (1107) (e.g., success or failure indication and a position estimate for the UE if requested and obtained).
  • AMF provides a location service response to the 5GC entity (1108) (e.g., position estimation for the UE).
  • AMF uses the location service response received in step 1107 to support the service triggered in step 1102 (1109) (e.g., providing location estimates related to emergency calls to GMLC).
  • AMF provides a location service response to the UE (1110) (e.g., position estimation for the UE).
  • Rel. 15 NR system periodic, aperiodic, and semi-persistent Rel. 15 SRS can be transmitted for UL RTOA (UL-Relative Time of Arrival), UL SRS-RSRP, and UL-AOA (UL-Angle of Arrival) measurements of base stations, thereby supporting UL TDOA and UL AOA.
  • UL RTOA UL-Relative Time of Arrival
  • SRS-RSRP UL-Relative Time of Arrival
  • UL-AOA UL-Angle of Arrival
  • periodic, aperiodic and semi-persistent SRS for positioning can be transmitted for UL RTOA, UL SRS-RSRP, UL-AOA and gNB Rx-Tx time difference measurement of the base station, thereby supporting UL TDOA, UL AOA and multi-RTT.
  • SRS has different RRC parameters set. For example, in the case of SRS for positioning, its settings are indicated through SRS-PosResources and SRS-PosResourceSet, and for SRS used for other purposes (e.g., Rel.15 SRS), its settings are indicated through SRS-Resources and SRS-ResourceSet.
  • SRS-PosResources and SRS-PosResourceSet For example, in the case of SRS for positioning, its settings are indicated through SRS-PosResources and SRS-PosResourceSet, and for SRS used for other purposes (e.g., Rel.15 SRS), its settings are indicated through SRS-Resources and SRS-ResourceSet.
  • SRS-p SRS for positioning
  • SRS-m SRS used for other purposes
  • the method of mapping SRS resources in the time/frequency domain on a resource grid is defined in a standard document.
  • SRS-m repetition can be set within a slot, and intra-slot frequency hopping is supported using this.
  • intra-slot repetition cannot be set based on the current NR standard (Rel-17), and intra-slot frequency hopping is also not supported.
  • Periodic/semi-persistent SRS-m inter-slot frequency hopping is supported in a periodic form.
  • An SRS-p setting is provided based on the serving cell (or camp on cell) of the terminal, and the SRS-p transmitted by the terminal based on the SRS-p setting can be received by one or more cells (or TRPs) including the serving cell.
  • SRS-p can be configured by RRC parameters SRS-PosResourceSet and SRS-PosResource defined in the TS 38.331 standard.
  • SRS-p the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource
  • SpatialRelationInfoPos an ID of a configuration field of a reference RS is provided.
  • the reference RS can be an SRS configured by the upper layer parameter SRS-Resource or SRS-PosResource, a CSI-RS, an SS/PBCH block, a DL PRS of a serving cell, or a DL PRS configured in an SS/PBCH block.
  • a UE is not expected to transmit multiple SRS resources with different spatial relationships in the same OFDM symbol.
  • the terminal may use a fixed spatial domain transmission filter or use another spatial domain transmission filter for transmission of SRS-p set by the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource across multiple SRS resources.
  • the UE transmits SRS-p configured by the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource within the active UL BWP.
  • the terminal does not expect SRS-PosResource to be set on a carrier of a serving cell having a slot format consisting of DL/UL symbols that are not set for PUSCH/PUCCH transmission.
  • SRS-p resources related to the initial UL BWP can be configured, and the SRS-p resources are transmitted within the initial UL BWP during RRC_INACTIVE mode with the same CP and subcarrier spacing as those configured for the initial UL BWP.
  • SRS-p resources for positioning can be configured outside the initial BWP in RRC_INACTIVE mode, and the frequency location and bandwidth, subcarrier spacing, and CP length for SRS-p transmission can be configured.
  • SRS-p resources configured outside the initial BWP in RRC_INACTIVE mode are configured in the same band and CC as the initial UL BWP.
  • wireless sensing is defined as a technology that uses radio waves to measure distance, angle, or instantaneous velocity to obtain information about the characteristics of the environment and/or surrounding objects.
  • the radio wave for sensing may share/reuse the radio wave for communication purposes (e.g. use of reference signal for communication purposes (e.g. SSB, DMRS, CSI-RS and/or SRS)) or design a separate radio wave for wireless sensing purposes.
  • wireless sensing supported by ISAC can be considered to be performed through a process in which a signal transmitted from a transmitter is reflected by a target object and received by a receiver, and a sensing mode of a scenario that is distinguished depending on the relationship between the transmitter and the receiver can be defined. Based on whether the transmitter and the receiver are identical, a case in which the transmitter and the receiver are the same can be defined as a mono-static sensing mode, and a case in which the transmitter and the receiver are different can be defined as a bi-static sensing mode.
  • Figure 12 illustrates examples of wireless sensing modes supported by ISAC.
  • the sensing mode when considering the transmission and reception operations and the nodes participating in them in the 3GPP standard, the sensing mode can be broadly classified as follows.
  • BS mono-static sensing mode BS that transmits radio waves receives the reflected signal.
  • BS-to-UE bi-static sensing mode UE receives the signal that is the reflection of the radio wave transmitted by BS.
  • BS mono-static sensing mode UE that transmits radio wave receives reflected signal
  • UE-to-UE bi-static sensing mode A signal reflected from a radio wave transmitted by a specific transmitting UE is received by another UE.
  • BS receives the reflected signal of the radio wave transmitted by the transmitting UE.
  • a sensing mode that includes multiple transmitting/receiving nodes can be referred to using the term multi-static sensing mode.
  • Wireless sensing through ISAC/JCAS is being considered for application in various scenarios.
  • wireless sensing is considered for the purpose of obtaining information about a target without a communication module (or regardless of the communication module), and the scenarios that can be considered as examples can be largely divided into three scenarios.
  • Object detection and tracking A scenario for sensing target objects or people or tracking location information. Representative scenarios that can be considered include intruder detection in indoor/outdoor situations, location tracking of UAVs or AGVs, and autonomous driving support.
  • (2) Environment monitoring A scenario for the purpose of collecting information about the environment around the transmitting/receiving node. Representative examples include rainfall information observation and flood sensing scenarios.
  • Motion monitoring A scenario for sensing the target’s motion, and representative examples include scenarios for distinguishing human motion or gestures.
  • the performance measures and levels required for each of the above scenarios vary and may differ from each other.
  • various key performance requirements need to be considered.
  • TS 22.137 of the 3GPP standard defines the key performance requirements for the performance required for each service scenario as positioning estimation accuracy, velocity estimation accuracy, confidence level, sensing resolution, missed detection probability, false alarm probability, sensing service maximum delay, and refreshing rate.
  • the level required for each key performance requirement may vary for each service scenario.
  • Radio frequency sensing capability can provide a service for object localization without a device, because it does not require a device to be connected to the object through a network.
  • the ability to obtain range, velocity and angle information from radio frequency signals can provide a wide range of new functions, such as various object sensing, object recognition (e.g., vehicles, humans, animals, UAVs), and high-precision localization, tracking, and activity recognition.
  • Wireless sensing services can provide information to a variety of industries (e.g., unmanned aerial vehicles, smart homes, V2X, factories, railways, public safety, etc.), enabling applications such as intruder sensing, assisted vehicle steering and navigation, trajectory tracking, collision avoidance, traffic management, health and traffic management, etc.
  • wireless sensing can use non-3GPP type sensors (e.g., radar, camera) to additionally support 3GPP-based sensing.
  • non-3GPP type sensors e.g., radar, camera
  • the operation of the wireless sensing service i.e., the sensing operation, can rely on the transmission, reflection and scattering processing of wireless sensing signals. Therefore, wireless sensing can provide an opportunity to enhance existing communication systems from communication networks to wireless communication and sensing networks.
  • FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 illustrate an example of applying ISAC to a 3GPP wireless communication system.
  • the embodiments of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 illustrates an example of sensing using a sensing receiver and a sensing transmitter located at the same location (e.g., monostatic sensing)
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an example of sensing using a separated sensing receiver and a sensing transmitter (e.g., bistatic sensing).
  • RedCap terminals In the case of RedCap terminals, the maximum frequency bandwidth supported by terminals supporting existing NR is smaller than that of normal UEs, so there may be a performance degradation in terms of the accuracy of decoding/detection of reference signals transmitted and received. Accordingly, frequency hopping is being considered and discussed as a key solution to improve the positioning accuracy of RedCap terminals.
  • the above frequency hopping scheme can be set separately from the BWP setting supported by the current NR Rel-18 standard because the RedCap terminal transmits while hopping the frequency bandwidth.
  • the setting of the uplink time window (hereinafter referred to as UTW) to ensure the transmission of the SRS-pos resource through the frequency hopping scheme can also be set separately from the setting of the BWP and/or the SRS-pos resource (hereinafter referred to as SRS-pos-FH) to which the frequency hopping is set.
  • the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH / UTW may need to be considered to determine the slot counting and/or the TA command value to which the TA is applied.
  • the UL transmission timing of some hop(s) of the SRS-pos-FH resource may be adjusted, but since base stations of neighboring cells do not share TA command information, there may be a degradation in performance in terms of accuracy when receiving and measuring the UL SRS-pos-FH resource transmitted by the terminal.
  • a RedCap terminal with a small maximum frequency bandwidth is required to perform RF retuning operation at each hopping.
  • a required switching gap between consecutive hops may be set according to the capability of the terminal, and if this is not guaranteed, some symbol(s) of SRS-pos-FH may be dropped. Accordingly, if TA is instructed to be applied to a slot where transmission of SRS-pos-resource is set, drop of some symbol(s) may occur.
  • the present disclosure proposes a TA operation method in a time resource where SRS-pos-FH resource is set to maintain the accuracy performance of a UL SRS-based positioning technique of a RedCap UE.
  • a TA command may be an absolute TA indication operation determined by a value indicated via a random access response or an absolute TA command MAC CE as described in 3GPP standards TS 38.213 and TS 38.321, or may be relevant when a MAC CE indicating timing adjustment is received.
  • the present disclosure proposes a method for setting/operating Timing Advance (TA) in an uplink SRS-pos frequency hopping transmission and/or a period in which a UL time window (UTW) is set.
  • TA Timing Advance
  • Part or all of the SRS-pos-FH resources and/or UTWs may be set between the slot in which the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which the TA is to be applied. In this situation, a method of determining the slot to which the TA is to be applied by considering the SCS is proposed.
  • the terminal receives a TA command in the nth UL slot, and the TA indicated by the TA command according to the existing method is applied in the n+k+1th UL slot.
  • SRS-pos-FH resources are set for 4 slots starting from the n+kth UL slot. Some of the slots for which SRS-pos-FH resources are set are located within the interval from slot n where the TA command is received to slot n+k+1 where TA should be applied.
  • a method is proposed to determine a slot to which TA is applied by considering SCS when at least a part of SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW is located within the interval slot n: slot n+k+1, or when at least a part of SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW overlaps slot n+k+1.
  • the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the configured SRS-pos-FH.
  • the SCS of SRS-pos-FH can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is applied.
  • the terminal can count slots based on the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH resource from UL slot n+k.
  • the terminal can count the application slot positions of new TAs based on the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH from UL slot n. The proposed method can be applied regardless of whether or not there is a drop due to collision with other signals/channels of the SRS-pos-FH resource.
  • the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the set UTW. For example, if a UTW is set in a slot section including a slot in which the terminal receives a TA command from the base station and a slot to which TA is to be applied, the SCS of the set UTW can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is to be applied.
  • slots can be counted based on the SCS of UTW starting from UL slot n+k.
  • a terminal receives a TA command in the nth UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+8th UL slot
  • UTW is configured for 2 slots starting from the n+4th UL slot within the slot range from the nth UL slot to the n+8th UL slot
  • slots can be counted based on the SCS of the UTW from the n+4th UL slot to the n+5th UL slot
  • slots can be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP from the n+6th UL slot.
  • the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the UL or UL/DL BWP configured in the terminal. Regardless of whether SRS-pos-FH resources and/or UTWs are configured, only the SCS of the active UL BWP can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is applied between the slot in which the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which TA is instructed to be applied.
  • slots can be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP regardless of whether SRS-pos-FH resource transmission start is set within the slot period from the n-th UL slot to the n+k+1-th UL slot, and if BWP switching occurs before the n+k+1-th UL slot, UL slots can be counted based on the SCS of the new active UL BWP.
  • the proposed method of Option 3 can be determined based on all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal, not the active UL BWP. Specifically, the smallest SCS among all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal can be set as the reference SCS, and the slot position can be determined based on this.
  • the terminal can calculate the applicable slot of the TA without considering the dropping of periodic SRS-pos-FH or the SP/AP SRS-pos-FH resources dynamically indicated from the base station, so there may be an advantage of reducing complexity.
  • the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the set SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW and the SCS of the set UL or UL/DL BWP.
  • the slot to which TA is applied can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCS of the set SRS-pos-FH / UTW and the SCS of the Active UL BWP.
  • the active UL BWP can be determined by replacing all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal.
  • the smallest SCS among all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal can be determined as the reference SCS, and the slot position can be determined based on this.
  • the SCS of the first UL transmission slot following the slot in which the instructed TA is received may be followed to determine the slot position to apply the TA.
  • the terminal receives a TA command in the n-th UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+k+1-th UL slot
  • the n+k+1-th slot may be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP of the n+1-th UL slot and the TA may be applied to the corresponding slot.
  • the base station can follow the SCS of the closest active UL BWP at the time of indicating TA, and may not consider the SCS of other SRS-pos-FH/UTW/new active UL BWP.
  • the proposed proposal 1-1 can be used for the purpose of supporting transmission of SRS-pos-FH in 3GPP, and the specific method thereof can be determined to follow the method for determining a TA adjustment application slot described in the TS 38.213 standard document.
  • the terminal if the terminal receives a TA command at the position of UL slot n, the terminal can determine to perform TA adjustment at the position of UL slot n+k+1+2 ⁇ *K offset , and at this time, the value of K offset can follow the definition of TS 38.213.
  • the criteria for determining n and k can be determined by one or a combination of the methods of the proposal 1-1.
  • slot n can be determined based on a specific SCS, and the specific SCS can be determined by one or a combination of the options suggested in the proposal 1-1 of the present disclosure.
  • a specific method by which k is determined can be determined by one or a combination of the methods of the proposed Proposal 1-1, which may be the same as or use a separate criterion from the method by which the slot n is determined.
  • N slot subframe, ⁇ used to calculate the parameters n and k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs, and N T,1 and N T,2 used to calculate the parameter k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured DL BWPs, and configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs.
  • N slot subframe, ⁇ used to calculate the parameters n and k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs, and N T,1 and N T,2 used to calculate the parameter k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs.
  • option 1-1 Some or all of the options in [Proposal 1-1] may be applied, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option. As a specific example, if UTW is set in the slot section between the slot where the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which TA is to be applied, option 2 may be applied, and if not, option 3 may be applied.
  • a method for determining a value to apply TA when a part or all of SRS-pos-FH resource and/or UTW is set to an application target slot instructed to apply TA by a terminal from a base station can be proposed.
  • a method may be proposed in which some of the SCSs used to determine the SCS when counting the TA target slots in [Proposal 1-1] are used to determine the value for applying TA.
  • the value for applying TA can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs considered for determining n and N slot subframes, ⁇ by [Proposal 1-1].
  • the TA value can be applied according to the absolute time length of the corresponding slot because it follows the SCS that counts the slots to which TA is applied.
  • a larger SCS among the set SRS-pos-FH / UTW and Active UL BWP may be considered to determine a value to apply TA.
  • the SCS of the TA value can be determined as 30 kHz.
  • the absolute time unit of the applied TA value becomes shorter when following the largest SCS, so that the TA can be adjusted more finely, and accordingly, the accuracy of the measurement of the SRS-pos-FH resource set for transmission is increased, which may have an advantage in terms of positioning accuracy performance.
  • the SCS of the Active UL BWP can be considered to determine the value of applying TA to the target slot instructed to apply TA by the base station.
  • the Active UL BWP can be based on the UL slot following the slot instructed to apply TA, and if BWP switching occurs before the slot to apply TA, it can be based on the new active UL BWP.
  • the SCS of the active UL BWP of the slot can be followed to determine the value of applying TA in the TA target slot instructed by the base station to the terminal or designated by [Proposal 2-1].
  • the SCS of SRS-pos-FH can be followed, and if both data and SRS-pos-FH are transmitted in the slot, the SCS of the signal/channel transmitted first can be followed.
  • the terminal is configured to sequentially perform data transmission and SRS-pos-FH transmission in a slot to which the terminal applies TA, the SCS of the active UL BWP can be followed to determine the TA application value.
  • the proposed method of option 3 above can be applied independently or in combination with the proposed method of option 3-1, and option 3-1 may not be applied independently.
  • timing adjustment can be made according to the numerology corresponding to the actual transmission of the terminal.
  • an upper node e.g. a base station or a location server
  • the base station can instruct TA operation through MAC CE, and if some or all of SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set in the slot section between the instructed slot and the slot to which the TA operation is applied, the SCS of the TA command information provided to the terminal can be determined by considering the UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP, etc.
  • the terminal may determine the TA application slot and value by considering the UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP, etc. set in the terminal according to the above option(s), and apply the TA accordingly.
  • a timing adjustment operation method of a terminal when a slot to which TA is applied is a slot within a section in which SRS-pos-FH transmission is set or a slot section in which UTW is set.
  • a method of postponing the application of TA can be considered as a timing adjustment operation method of the terminal.
  • the terminal can postpone the application of TA to the second slot located after the first slot.
  • the timing adjustment operation of the terminal can be divided into a timing adjustment operation performed by the instruction of the TA command value through the MAC CE or RAR of the base station and a gradual timing adjustment operation performed by the terminal itself through a threshold comparison of the transmission timing error between the terminal and the reference timing.
  • a method of postponing both the application of the TA indicated by the base station and the application of the terminal's own TA can be considered, and a method of postponing only the application of the terminal's own TA without postponing the TA indicated by the base station can be considered.
  • Each of these is described separately as option 1 and option 2.
  • Option 1 Method of postponing the application of both the TA indicated by the base station and the terminal's own TA.
  • the terminal may decide not to perform application of both the TA indicated by the base station and its own TA in the slot, and may decide to postpone the TA application time. For example, the application of TA may be postponed to a slot position determined by [Proposal 2-1-2].
  • the TA value is applied differently between hops during the process of performing SRS-pos-FH, neighboring cells other than the serving cell may not recognize the information about the TA adjustment, which may cause errors in measuring the reception timing. If the proposed method of option 1 is applied, there may be an advantage in that the positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed because the transmission of SRS-pos-FH with TA change applied is not completely expected within the section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set.
  • the timing of applying the TA may be postponed (for example, it may be postponed to a slot position determined by [Proposal 2-1-2]), and if the TA is indicated to the terminal from the base station, it may be determined to perform TA adjustment at a slot position determined according to a pre-determined rule (for example, performing timing adjustment equivalent to the TA value determined by [Proposal 1-2] at the slot position determined by [Proposal 1-1]).
  • the method of [Proposal 2-2] may be additionally followed.
  • the UL transmission timing adjustment of the terminal may not be delayed because the base station can instruct TA for the section where SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set.
  • the phenomenon of the SRS-pos-FH reception performance degradation on the serving cell side can be prevented by preventing the terminal's own TA operation that the serving cell does not recognize.
  • a timing adjustment operation method of a terminal when a slot to which TA is applied is a slot within a section in which SRS-pos-FH transmission is set or a slot section in which UTW is set.
  • a method(s) for postponing the instructed TA application operation to a specific slot position can be proposed.
  • the specific slot position can be considered as the next slot of the last slot of the slot section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is configured, the earliest slot where there is a hop-to-hop time interval satisfying a specific condition, the next slot of the last slot of the slot section where UTW is configured, and the earliest UL slot where SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted.
  • Each of these is described as option 1, option 2, option 3, and option 4, respectively.
  • Option 1 Method of postponing SRS-pos-FH transmission to the next slot after the last slot in the set slot section.
  • a method can be proposed to postpone the instructed TA application operation to the slot following the last slot of the slot section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set.
  • Option 2 A method of postponing to the fastest slot where there is a time interval between hops that satisfies certain conditions.
  • the instructed TA application operation can be postponed to the earliest slot where the corresponding hop-to-hop time interval exists. If there is no hop-to-hop time interval corresponding to the 'specific condition', it can operate with another option.
  • SCS can be considered according to the method of the above-mentioned [Proposal 1-1] or [Proposal 1-2].
  • a method can be proposed in which the instructed TA application operation is postponed to the slot following the last slot of the slot section in which UTW transmission is set.
  • SRS-pos-FH is postponed to the fastest UL slot where it is not actually transmitted.
  • the fastest UL slot where SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted can mean the slot after transmission of the set/instructed SRS-pos-FH is completed if the corresponding SRS-pos-FH does not collide with another UL signal/channel, and if a collision occurs with another UL signal/channel, the position of the slot where transmission of another signal/channel is performed while the SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted by the dropping rule can be determined.
  • the UE may decide to apply the same TA between the transmission of the remaining hops of SRS-pos-FH and the transmission of the hops of SRS-pos-FH transmitted before the collision (i.e., to return to the TA value before TA adjustment). This may be for the purpose of aligning the TA values between the hops constituting the SRS-pos-FH to improve the detection accuracy of the base station. Afterwards, after all transmissions of SRS-pos-FH are completed, the UE may decide to perform UL transmission by reapplying the indicated TA adjustment as in the operation of Option 1.
  • Some or all of the options of the above-mentioned proposed [Proposal 2-1-2] may be applied, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option.
  • the above-mentioned proposed method of option 3 may be applied, and if SRS-pos-FH is set in a slot to which the TA indicated to the terminal is to be applied and UTW is not set, the above-mentioned proposed method of option 1 may be applied.
  • the upper node e.g. the base station or the location server
  • the base station can determine the SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW information and provide it through a higher layer signal (e.g. RRC or LPP) or a dynamic indication signal.
  • the base station can instruct a TA operation through MAC CE, and if the SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can expect reception of a signal/channel different from the SRS-pos-FH resource by considering the TA command information provided to the terminal and the method of postponing the TA application operation according to the option(s).
  • the terminal After the terminal receives the TA application indication information from the base station, if the SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can apply the TA operation indicated by the option(s) at the corresponding location.
  • a method for limiting the TA application position may be proposed to prevent unnecessary SRS-pos-FH symbol drop and to allow the base station to know the position of the dropped symbol when it is dropped.
  • a method of granting low priority to symbols within the TA application slot and a method of applying TA from the symbol(s) within a time gap that exists between hops corresponding to a specific condition within the TA application slot may be considered. Each of these is described separately as option 1 and option 2.
  • a lower priority can be given to the symbol(s) composing the slot than to other slots, and priorities can be given among the symbols in ascending/descending order of symbol index.
  • the above priority can mean that when TA is to be applied, it is applied starting from a symbol with a lower priority.
  • the terminal can apply the TA starting from the symbol located at the backmost (or frontmost) in the slot.
  • a lower priority can be given to the symbol(s) for which the resource is not set than to the symbol(s) for which the SRS-pos-FH resource is set.
  • the position of the hop-to-hop interval to which TA is applied is determined among the hop-to-hop interval(s) of SRS-pos-FH resources within the TA application slot. Therefore, if a drop of SRS-pos-FH resources occurs due to TA application, there may be an advantage in that the base station can accurately know the position of the dropped SRS symbol.
  • the instructed TA application operation can apply TA from symbol(s) within the corresponding time gap. If there is no hop-to-hop time gap corresponding to the 'specific condition', it can operate with another option.
  • the terminal can apply TA from symbol(s) between the corresponding hops.
  • SCS can be considered according to the method of the above-mentioned [Proposal 1-1] or [Proposal 1-2].
  • the options of the above proposed [Proposal 2-2-1] may be applied in part or in whole, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option.
  • the TA application symbol(s) may be determined by the priority determined by option 1.
  • the required switching gap between hops is set by the base station according to the UE capability reported by the terminal and is set in absolute time units.
  • the TA command value is calculated mathematically by the index value of the MAC CE indicated by the base station or determined by the terminal's own adjustment operation.
  • the timing adjustment operation method of the terminal it is possible to propose an operation method of the terminal according to the relationship between the two parameters based on the SCS determined according to [Proposal 1-2].
  • the terminal performs the timing adjustment operation instructed by the base station or determined by itself, and no additional operation may be expected.
  • the terminal floors the difference value between the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA and the required hop-to-hop interval to the symbol level of the SCS determined according to [Proposal 1-2] and drops the SRS symbol(s) of the adjacent hop.
  • a method of determining the adjacent SRS symbol(s) to be dropped can consider a method of giving priority to the SRS symbols in the timing adjustment application slot in ascending/descending order of symbol index.
  • a method of assigning priority to SRS symbols in the slot to which timing adjustment is applied in ascending/descending order of symbol index is applied in ascending/descending order of symbol index.
  • the base station can accurately know the location of the dropped SRS symbol when SRS-pos-FH is dropped due to TA application.
  • an upper node e.g. a base station or a location server
  • the base station can instruct TA operation through MAC CE, and if SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can expect reception of SRS-pos-FH resource by determining TA application operation within the corresponding slot according to TA command information provided to the terminal and the above option(s).
  • the terminal After receiving TA application indication information from the base station, if SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can perform TA application operation within the corresponding slot according to the above option(s), and in some cases, can drop transmission of SRS-pos-FH resource according to the above option(s) method.
  • the base station reports measurements using the received SRSp resources to the LMF, and the LMF can estimate the location of the terminal through the measurements.
  • Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining the operation of a terminal and a network according to one embodiment.
  • the terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal, but is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal may receive at least one upper layer signaling from the network (1705).
  • the upper layer signaling may include BWP configuration information for configuring one or more BWPs in the terminal.
  • the BWP configuration information may include information on an SCS of the corresponding BWP.
  • One of the one or more BWPs configured in the terminal may be an active BWP of the terminal.
  • the upper layer signaling may include configuration information on an SRS for positioning.
  • the configuration information on the SRS for positioning may include information on an SRS band, information on SRS frequency hopping, and information on an SCS to be used for SRS transmission within the SRS band.
  • the SRS band may be a virtual BW that aggregates BWPs configured in the terminal, and the terminal may perform RF retuning according to frequency hopping and transmit the SRS.
  • the SCS of the SRS may be configured independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs configured in the terminal.
  • the terminal can receive a TA command from the network.
  • the TA command is for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to the uplink transmission of the terminal, and can be received through a RAR (random access response) or a TA command MAC (medium access control) CE (control element).
  • the terminal can determine an index of a first slot at which the received TA command will start to be applied (1715).
  • the index of the first slot can be determined based on a first SCS (subcarrier spacing).
  • the first SCS can be a smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCSs of one or more BWPs configured for the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of the one or more BWPs configured for the terminal.
  • the terminal can hop frequencies based on the configuration information for the SRS and transmit an SRS for positioning (1720).
  • the same TA value can be maintained while the SRS is being transmitted.
  • the terminal can start applying the adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot (1725).
  • the second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the transmission section of the SRS.
  • the second slot can be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.
  • the terminal can transmit an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value (1730).
  • FIG. 18 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a terminal according to one embodiment.
  • a terminal can receive a TA command from a network for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal (1805).
  • the terminal can determine the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command (1810).
  • the terminal can transmit an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value (1815).
  • the terminal can start applying the above-mentioned adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the above second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the transmission section of the SRS.
  • the above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.
  • the terminal can receive SRS configuration information including information on SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.
  • the SCS of the above SRS can be set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot may be determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing).
  • the above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.
  • the terminal can transmit the SRS by frequency hopping in the above transmission section.
  • the same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being transmitted.
  • the above TA command can be received via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).
  • RAR random access response
  • MAC medium access control
  • the above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a base station according to one embodiment.
  • a base station can transmit a TA command to a terminal for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal (1905).
  • the base station can determine the index of the first slot associated with the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command (1910).
  • the base station can receive an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value (1915).
  • the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value can start from the second slot located after the first slot.
  • the above second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the reception section of the SRS.
  • the above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the reception section of the SRS.
  • the base station can transmit SRS configuration information including information on the SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.
  • the SCS of the above SRS can be set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot may be determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing).
  • the above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.
  • the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.
  • the base station can receive the SRS by hopping frequencies in the above receiving section.
  • the same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being received.
  • the above TA command can be transmitted via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).
  • RAR random access response
  • MAC medium access control
  • the above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.
  • Fig. 20 illustrates a communication system (1) applicable to the present embodiment.
  • the communication system (1) includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network.
  • the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device.
  • a wireless access technology e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)
  • the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400).
  • the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc.
  • the vehicle may include an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) (e.g., a drone).
  • UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
  • XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc.
  • HMD Head-Mounted Device
  • HUD Head-Up Display
  • Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.).
  • Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc.
  • IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc.
  • base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.
  • Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300).
  • the network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc.
  • the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network.
  • vehicles can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication).
  • IoT devices e.g., sensors
  • IoT devices can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).
  • Wireless communication/connection can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200).
  • the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul).
  • 5G NR wireless access technologies
  • a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other.
  • the wireless communication/connection can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels.
  • various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure.
  • the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • ⁇ the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200) ⁇ can correspond to ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the base station (200) ⁇ and/or ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x) ⁇ of FIG. 21.
  • a first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108).
  • the processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106).
  • the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104).
  • the memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108).
  • the transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit.
  • the wireless device may mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • the second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208).
  • the processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204).
  • the memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in the present document.
  • the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208).
  • the transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit.
  • the wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202).
  • one or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP).
  • One or more processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • PDUs Protocol Data Units
  • SDUs Service Data Units
  • One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) comprising PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206).
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • signals e.g., baseband signals
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer.
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSPs Digital Signal Processors
  • DSPDs Digital Signal Processing Devices
  • PLDs Programmable Logic Devices
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc.
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202).
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.
  • One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208).
  • one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.
  • Fig. 22 illustrates another example of a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure.
  • the wireless device may be implemented in various forms depending on the use-case/service (see Fig. 20).
  • the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 21 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules.
  • the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140).
  • the communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114).
  • the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 21.
  • the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 21.
  • the control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130).
  • control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).
  • the additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device.
  • the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit.
  • the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 21, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 21, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 21, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 21, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 21, 100e), an IoT device (FIG.
  • Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.
  • various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110).
  • the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110).
  • each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements.
  • the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets.
  • control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphic processing processor, a memory control processor, etc.
  • memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.
  • Fig. 23 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applicable to the present disclosure.
  • the vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.
  • AV manned/unmanned aerial vehicle
  • a vehicle or autonomous vehicle may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d).
  • the antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110).
  • Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 22, respectively.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc.
  • the control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations.
  • the control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
  • the drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground.
  • the drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc.
  • the power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight sensing sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc.
  • IMU intial measurement unit
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.
  • the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data.
  • the control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control).
  • the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server.
  • An external server can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicles or autonomous vehicles.
  • the present disclosure can be used in various devices including networks such as terminals, base stations, and/or location servers of wireless mobile communication systems.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A terminal according to at least one of examples disclosed in the present specification may: receive, from a network, a timing advance (TA) command for adjusting a TA value related to uplink transmission; determine an index of a first slot related to application of the TA value adjusted on the basis of the TA command; and transmit an uplink signal on the basis of the adjusted TA value, wherein, on the basis that the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value is included in a transmission interval of a sounding reference signal (SRS) transmitted while performing frequency hopping for positioning, the terminal may start the application of the adjusted TA value from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot may be selected from among slots located after the transmission interval of the SRS.

Description

무선 통신 시스템에서 단말 또는 기지국에 의해 수행되는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치Method performed by a terminal or base station in a wireless communication system and device therefor

본 명세서는 무선 통신 시스템에 관한 것으로, 보다 상세하게는 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말 또는 기지국이 상/하향링크 신호를 송신 또는 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치에 관한 것이다. This specification relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method for transmitting or receiving uplink/downlink signals by a terminal or a base station in a wireless communication system, and a device therefor.

무선 통신 시스템이 음성이나 데이터 등과 같은 다양한 종류의 통신 서비스를 제공하기 위해 광범위하게 전개되고 있다. 일반적으로 무선통신 시스템은 가용한 시스템 자원(대역폭, 전송 파워 등)을 공유하여 다중 사용자와의 통신을 지원할 수 있는 다중 접속(multiple access) 시스템이다. 다중 접속 시스템의 예들로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access) 시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access) 시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템 등이 있다.Wireless communication systems are being widely deployed to provide various types of communication services such as voice and data. In general, wireless communication systems are multiple access systems that can support communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). Examples of multiple access systems include CDMA (code division multiple access) systems, FDMA (frequency division multiple access) systems, TDMA (time division multiple access) systems, OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) systems, and SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) systems.

NR 시스템에서는 단말의 UL timing 동기를 위하여 TA (timing advance) 조절을 위한 TA command 가 네트워크로부터 단말에 제공될 수 있으며, 이 경우 단말은 configured UL BWPs의 SCS(subcarrier spacing)들 중에서 가장 작은 SCS에 기초하여 TA command가 적용될 슬롯을 결정한다.In the NR system, a TA command for adjusting TA (timing advance) for UL timing synchronization of the terminal can be provided to the terminal from the network, and in this case, the terminal determines the slot to which the TA command is to be applied based on the smallest SCS (subcarrier spacing) among the configured UL BWPs.

최근 NR에서 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말을 지원하기 위하여 positioning을 위한 SRS의 주파수 호핑의 도입이 논의되고 있다.Recently, the introduction of frequency hopping of SRS for positioning is being discussed to support RedCap (reduced capability) terminals in NR.

이루고자 하는 기술적 과제는 무선 통신 시스템에서 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 신호를 송신 또는 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치를 제공하는데 있다. 일 예로, 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS와 TA command 적용이 중첩되는 상황에서 포지셔닝 정확도를 보장하고, TA 적용의 모호성 문제를 해결하기 위한 방법 및 장치가 제공될 수 있다.The technical problem to be achieved is to provide a method and a device for transmitting or receiving a signal more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system. For example, a method and device for ensuring positioning accuracy and resolving the ambiguity problem of TA application in a situation where SRS transmitted by hopping frequencies for positioning overlaps with TA command application can be provided.

이루고자 하는 기술적 과제는 이에 한정되지 않으며 다른 기술적 과제들이 개시된 실시예로부터 유추될 수 있다.The technical tasks to be achieved are not limited to this, and other technical tasks can be inferred from the disclosed embodiments.

본 개시의 일 측면에 따른 단말에 의해 수행되는 방법은, 상기 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 네트워크로부터 수신; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신하는 것을 포함하고, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 송신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 단말은 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작하고, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.A method performed by a terminal according to one aspect of the present disclosure comprises: receiving a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal from a network; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein, based on the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value being included in a transmission interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted while frequency hopping for positioning, the terminal starts applying the adjusted TA value from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the transmission interval of the SRS.

상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간이 직후에 위치한 슬롯일 수 있다.The above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.

단말은 상기 SRS의 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 대한 정보를 포함하는 SRS 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다.The terminal can receive SRS configuration information including information on SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.

상기 SRS의 SCS는 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP(bandwidth part)들의 SCS들과는 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다.The SCS of the above SRS can be set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal.

상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스는 제1 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.The index of the first slot may be determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing).

상기 제1 SCS는 상기 SRS의 SCS와 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들 중 가장 작은 SCS일 수 있다.The above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.

상기 SRS의 SCS가 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들보다 작은 것에 기반하여, 상기 SRS의 SCS에 기초하여 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스가 결정될 수 있다.Based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of one or more BWPs set for the terminal, the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.

단말은 상기 송신 구간에서 주파수를 호핑하며 상기 SRS를 송신할 수 있다.The terminal can transmit the SRS by frequency hopping in the above transmission section.

상기 SRS가 송신되는 동안에는 동일한 TA 값이 유지될 수 있다.The same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being transmitted.

상기 TA 명령은 RAR (random access response) 또는 TA 명령 MAC(medium access control) CE(control element)를 통해서 수신될 수 있다.The above TA command can be received via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).

상기 단말은 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말일 수 있다.The above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.

본 개시의 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 비-일시적(non-transitory) 기록 매체가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described above may be provided.

본 개시의 또 다른 일 측면에 따른 기기는, 명령어들을 저장하도록 구성된 메모리; 및 상기 명령어들을 실행함으로써 동작들을 수행하도록 구성된 프로세서를 포함하고, 상기 프로세서의 동작들은: 상기 기기의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 네트워크로부터 수신; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신하는 것을 포함하고, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 송신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 기기는 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작하고, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a device includes a memory configured to store instructions; and a processor configured to perform operations by executing the instructions, wherein the operations of the processor include: receiving a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the device from a network; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein the device starts applying the adjusted TA value from a second slot located after the first slot based on the first slot being included in a transmission period of an SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted while hopping frequencies for positioning, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the transmission period of the SRS.

상기 기기는 무선 통신 시스템에서 동작하는 단말을 제어하기 위한 프로세싱 기기일 수 있다.The above device may be a processing device for controlling a terminal operating in a wireless communication system.

상기 기기는 송수신기를 더 포함할 수 있다. The above device may further include a transceiver.

상기 기기는 무선 통신 시스템에서 동작하는 단말일 수 있다.The above device may be a terminal operating in a wireless communication system.

본 개시의 또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 기지국에 의해 수행되는 방법은, 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 상기 단말에 송신; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및 상기 단말이 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 송신하는 상향링크 신호를 수신하는 것을 포함하고, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 수신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 수신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용이 시작되고, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a method performed by a base station includes transmitting, to a terminal, a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein, based on whether the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value is included in a reception interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) received while frequency hopping for positioning, application of the adjusted TA value starts from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the reception interval of the SRS.

본 개시의 또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 비-일시적(non-transitory) 기록 매체가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a non-transitory computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described above may be provided.

본 개시의 또 다른 일 측면에 따른 기지국은, 명령어들을 저장하도록 구성된 메모리; 및 상기 명령어들을 실행함으로써 동작들을 수행하도록 구성된 프로세서를 포함하고, 상기 프로세서의 동작들은: 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 상기 단말에 송신; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및 상기 단말이 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 송신하는 상향링크 신호를 수신하는 것을 포함하고, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 수신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 수신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용이 시작되고, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.According to another aspect of the present disclosure, a base station includes a memory configured to store commands; and a processor configured to perform operations by executing the commands, wherein the operations of the processor include: transmitting, to the terminal, a TA command for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; determining an index of a first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value based on the TA command; and receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, wherein the first slot related to application of the adjusted TA value is included in a reception interval of an SRS (sounding reference signal) received while hopping frequencies for positioning, and application of the adjusted TA value starts from a second slot located after the first slot, and the second slot can be selected from among slots located after the reception interval of the SRS.

일 실시예에 따르면 무선 통신 시스템에서 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 신호가 송신 또는 수신될 수 있다. 일 예로, 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS와 TA command 적용이 중첩되는 상황에서 TA command 적용을 연기함으로써 포지셔닝 정확도가 보장되고, TA 적용의 모호성 문제를 해결될 수 있다.According to one embodiment, a signal can be transmitted or received more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system. For example, in a situation where SRS transmitted by hopping frequencies for positioning overlaps with TA command application, positioning accuracy can be ensured and the ambiguity problem of TA application can be resolved by postponing the application of the TA command.

기술적 효과는 이에 한정되지 않으며 다른 기술적 효과들이 개시된 실시예로부터 유추될 수 있다.The technical effects are not limited thereto and other technical effects can be inferred from the disclosed embodiments.

도 1은 무선 통신 시스템의 일례인 3GPP 시스템에 이용되는 물리 채널들 및 이들을 이용한 일반적인 신호 전송 방법을 예시한다.Figure 1 illustrates physical channels used in a 3GPP system, which is an example of a wireless communication system, and a general signal transmission method using the channels.

도 2는 무선 프레임(radio frame)의 구조를 예시한다.Figure 2 illustrates the structure of a radio frame.

도 3은 슬롯의 자원 그리드(resource grid)를 예시한다.Figure 3 illustrates a resource grid of a slot.

도 4는 슬롯 내에 물리 채널이 맵핑되는 예를 도시한다.Figure 4 illustrates an example of physical channels being mapped within a slot.

도 5은 PDSCH 수신 및 ACK/NACK 전송 과정을 예시한다. Figure 5 illustrates the PDSCH reception and ACK/NACK transmission process.

도 6은 PUSCH 전송 과정을 예시한다. Figure 6 illustrates the PUSCH transmission process.

도 7은 포지셔닝 프로토콜 설정의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of positioning protocol settings.

도 8은 OTDOA의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of OTDOA.

도 9는 Multi RTT의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 9 is a diagram showing an example of Multi RTT.

도 10은 일 실시예에 따른 네트워크 노드 (e.g., 단말의 상위 노드, LMF 등) 동작의 절차를 도시한다.Figure 10 illustrates a procedure for operation of a network node (e.g., an upper node of a terminal, an LMF, etc.) according to one embodiment.

도 11은 positioning measurement를 수행하는 단말 동작의 절차를 도시한다.Figure 11 illustrates the procedure of terminal operation for performing positioning measurement.

도 12는 다양한 ISAC 환경을 도시한다.Figure 12 illustrates various ISAC environments.

도 13 및 도 14는 ISAC을 지원하는 3GPP 무선 통신 시스템에 대한 예시들이다.Figures 13 and 14 are examples of 3GPP wireless communication systems supporting ISAC.

도 15는 TA command 수신/적용 및 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS 송신의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 15 illustrates an example of SRS transmission for TA command reception/application and positioning.

도 16은 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS 송신에 기초하여, TA의 적용을 제1 슬롯에서 제2 슬롯으로 연기하는 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 16 illustrates an example of postponing the application of TA from the first slot to the second slot based on SRS transmission for positioning.

도 17은 일 실시예에 따른 단말과 네트워크의 동작을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining the operation of a terminal and a network according to one embodiment.

도 18는 일 실시예에 따라서 단말에 의해 수행되는 방법의 흐름을 도시한다.FIG. 18 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a terminal according to one embodiment.

도 19는 일 실시예에 따라서 기지국에 의해 수행되는 방법의 흐름을 도시한다.FIG. 19 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a base station according to one embodiment.

도 20 내지 도 23은 본 개시에 적용 가능한 통신 시스템(1)과 무선 기기를 예시한다.Figures 20 to 23 illustrate a communication system (1) and a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure.

이하의 기술은 CDMA(code division multiple access), FDMA(frequency division multiple access), TDMA(time division multiple access), OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 등과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 시스템에 사용될 수 있다. CDMA는 UTRA(Universal Terrestrial Radio Access)나 CDMA2000과 같은 무선 기술(radio technology)로 구현될 수 있다. TDMA는 GSM(Global System for Mobile communications)/GPRS(General Packet Radio Service)/EDGE(Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution)와 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. OFDMA는 IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(Evolved UTRA) 등과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. UTRA는 UMTS(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System)의 일부이다. 3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project) LTE(long term evolution)은 E-UTRA를 사용하는 E-UMTS(Evolved UMTS)의 일부이고 LTE-A(Advanced)는 3GPP LTE의 진화된 버전이다. 3GPP NR(New Radio or New Radio Access Technology)는 3GPP LTE/LTE-A의 진화된 버전이다. The following technology can be used in various wireless access systems, such as CDMA (code division multiple access), FDMA (frequency division multiple access), TDMA (time division multiple access), OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access), and SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access). CDMA can be implemented with radio technologies such as UTRA (Universal Terrestrial Radio Access) or CDMA2000. TDMA can be implemented with radio technologies such as GSM (Global System for Mobile communications)/GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)/EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution). OFDMA can be implemented with radio technologies such as IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA (Evolved UTRA). UTRA is a part of UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System). 3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project) LTE(long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS(Evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA, and LTE-A(Advanced) is an evolved version of 3GPP LTE. 3GPP NR(New Radio or New Radio Access Technology) is an evolved version of 3GPP LTE/LTE-A.

더욱 많은 통신 기기들이 더욱 큰 통신 용량을 요구하게 됨에 따라 기존의 RAT(Radio Access Technology)에 비해 향상된 모바일 브로드밴드 통신에 대한 필요성이 대두되고 있다. 또한, 다수의 기기 및 사물들을 연결하여 언제 어디서나 다양한 서비스를 제공하는 massive MTC(Machine Type Communications)도 차세대 통신에서 고려될 주요 이슈 중 하나이다. 또한, 신뢰도(reliability) 및 지연(latency)에 민감한 서비스/단말을 고려한 통신 시스템 디자인이 논의되고 있다. 이와 같이 eMBB(enhanced Mobile BroadBand Communication), massive MTC, URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) 등을 고려한 차세대 RAT의 도입이 논의되고 있으며, 본 발명의 일 실시예에서는 편의상 해당 기술을 NR(New Radio 또는 New RAT)이라고 부른다.As more and more communication devices require greater communication capacity, there is a growing need for improved mobile broadband communications compared to existing RATs (Radio Access Technology). In addition, massive MTC (Machine Type Communications), which connects multiple devices and objects to provide various services anytime and anywhere, is also one of the major issues to be considered in next-generation communications. In addition, a communication system design that considers services/terminals that are sensitive to reliability and latency is being discussed. In this way, the introduction of next-generation RATs that consider eMBB (enhanced Mobile BroadBand Communication), massive MTC, URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication), etc., is being discussed, and in one embodiment of the present invention, the corresponding technology is conveniently called NR (New Radio or New RAT).

본 명세서 사용되는 '기지국' 용어는 고정국(fixed station), Node B, gNode B(gNB), 액세스 포인트(Access Point, AP), 셀(cell) 또는 TRP (transmission and reception point) 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다. 중계기는 Relay Node(RN), 중계국(Relay Station) 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다. 또한, '단말' 용어는 사용자 기기(User Equipment, UE), 이동국 (Mobile Station, MS), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station), SS(Subscriber Station) 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다.The term 'base station' used in this specification can be replaced with terms such as fixed station, Node B, gNode B (gNB), Access Point (AP), cell, or transmission and reception point (TRP). The term 'relay' can be replaced with terms such as Relay Node (RN), Relay Station, etc. In addition, the term 'terminal' can be replaced with terms such as User Equipment (UE), Mobile Station (MS), Mobile Subscriber Station (MSS), Subscriber Station (SS).

설명을 명확하게 하기 위해, 3GPP NR을 위주로 기술하지만 본 발명의 기술적 사상이 이에 제한되는 것은 아니다.For clarity of explanation, the description will focus on 3GPP NR, but the technical idea of the present invention is not limited thereto.

본 발명과 관련한 배경 기술, 용어 정의 및 약어 등을 위해서 하기 문서들이 참조될 수 있다(Incorporated by Reference).The following documents may be referenced for background information, definitions of terms, abbreviations, etc. related to the present invention (Incorporated by Reference).

- 38.211: Physical channels and modulation- 38.211: Physical channels and modulation

- 38.212: Multiplexing and channel coding- 38.212: Multiplexing and channel coding

- 38.213: Physical layer procedures for control- 38.213: Physical layer procedures for control

- 38.214: Physical layer procedures for data- 38.214: Physical layer procedures for data

- 38.215: Physical layer measurements- 38.215: Physical layer measurements

- 38.300: NR and NG-RAN Overall Description- 38.300: NR and NG-RAN Overall Description

- 38.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode and in RRC Inactive state- 38.304: User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode and in RRC Inactive state

- 38.321Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification- 38.321Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification

- 38.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification- 38.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification

- 37.213: Introduction of channel access procedures to unlicensed spectrum for NR-based access- 37.213: Introduction of channel access procedures to unlicensed spectrum for NR-based access

- 36.355: LTE Positioning Protocol- 36.355: LTE Positioning Protocol

- 37.355: LTE Positioning Protocol- 37.355: LTE Positioning Protocol

용어 및 약어Terms and Abbreviations

- 5GC: 5G Core Network - 5GC: 5G Core Network

- 5GS: 5G System - 5GS: 5G System

- AoA: Angle of Arrival - AoA: Angle of Arrival

- AP: Access Point - AP: Access Point

- CID: Cell ID- CID: Cell ID

- E-CID: Enhanced Cell ID - E-CID: Enhanced Cell ID

- GNSS: Global Navigation Satellite System - GNSS: Global Navigation Satellite System

- GPS: Global Positioning System - GPS: Global Positioning System

- LCS: LoCation Service - LCS: LoCation Service

- LMF: Location Management Function - LMF: Location Management Function

- LPP: LTE Positioning Protocol - LPP: LTE Positioning Protocol

- MO-LR: Mobile Originated Location Request - MO-LR: Mobile Originated Location Request

- MT-LR: Mobile Terminated Location Request - MT-LR: Mobile Terminated Location Request

- NRPPa: NR Positioning Protocol A - NRPPa: NR Positioning Protocol A

- OTDOA: Observed Time Difference Of Arrival - OTDOA: Observed Time Difference Of Arrival

- PDU: Protocol Data Unit - PDU: Protocol Data Unit

- PRS: Positioning Reference Signal - PRS: Positioning Reference Signal

- RRM: Radio Resource Management - RRM: Radio Resource Management

- RSSI: Received Signal Strength Indicator - RSSI: Received Signal Strength Indicator

- RSTD: Reference Signal Time Difference - RSTD: Reference Signal Time Difference

- ToA: Time of Arrival - ToA: Time of Arrival

- TP: Transmission Point - TP: Transmission Point

- TRP: Transmission and Reception Point - TRP: Transmission and Reception Point

- UE: User Equipment - UE: User Equipment

- SS: Search Space- SS: Search Space

- CSS: Common Search Space- CSS: Common Search Space

- USS: UE-specific Search Space- USS: UE-specific Search Space

- PDCCH: Physical Downlink Control Channel - PDCCH: Physical Downlink Control Channel

- PDSCH: Physical Downlink Shared Channel; - PDSCH: Physical Downlink Shared Channel;

- PUCCH: Physical Uplink Control Channel; - PUCCH: Physical Uplink Control Channel;

- PUSCH: Physical Uplink Shared Channel; - PUSCH: Physical Uplink Shared Channel;

- DCI: Downlink Control Information- DCI: Downlink Control Information

- UCI: Uplink Control Information- UCI: Uplink Control Information

- SI: System Information - SI: System Information

- SIB: System Information Block- SIB: System Information Block

- MIB: Master Information Block - MIB: Master Information Block

- RRC: Radio Resource Control- RRC: Radio Resource Control

- DRX: Discontinuous Reception- DRX: Discontinuous Reception

- RNTI: Radio Network Temporary Identifier - RNTI: Radio Network Temporary Identifier

- CSI: Channel state information - CSI: Channel state information

- PCell: Primary Cell- PCell: Primary Cell

- SCell: Secondary Cell- SCell: Secondary Cell

- PSCell: Primary SCG(Secondary Cell Group) Cell- PSCell: Primary SCG (Secondary Cell Group) Cell

- CA: Carrier Aggregation - CA: Carrier Aggregation

- WUS: Wake up Signal - WUS: Wake up Signal

- TX: Transmitter - TX: Transmitter

- RX: Receiver - RX: Receiver

- RSTD: Reference Signal Time Difference- RSTD: Reference Signal Time Difference

- RS: Reference Signal- RS: Reference Signal

- PRS: Positioning Reference Signal- PRS: Positioning Reference Signal

- SRS: Sounding Reference Signal - SRS: Sounding Reference Signal

무선 통신 시스템에서 단말은 기지국으로부터 하향링크(Downlink, DL)를 통해 정보를 수신하고, 단말은 기지국으로 상향링크(Uplink, UL)를 통해 정보를 전송한다. 기지국과 단말이 송수신하는 정보는 데이터 및 다양한 제어 정보를 포함하고, 이들이 송수신 하는 정보의 종류/용도에 따라 다양한 물리 채널이 존재한다.In a wireless communication system, a terminal receives information from a base station through a downlink (DL), and the terminal transmits information to the base station through an uplink (UL). The information transmitted and received by the base station and the terminal includes data and various control information, and various physical channels exist depending on the type/purpose of the information they transmit and receive.

도 1은 3GPP NR 시스템에 이용되는 물리 채널들 및 이들을 이용한 일반적인 신호 전송 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다. Figure 1 is a drawing for explaining physical channels used in a 3GPP NR system and a general signal transmission method using them.

전원이 꺼진 상태에서 다시 전원이 켜지거나, 새로이 셀에 진입한 단말은 단계 S101에서 기지국과 동기를 맞추는 등의 초기 셀 탐색(Initial cell search) 작업을 수행한다. 이를 위해 단말은 기지국으로부터 SSB(Synchronization Signal Block)를 수신한다. SSB는 PSS(Primary Synchronization Signal), SSS(Secondary Synchronization Signal) 및 PBCH(Physical Broadcast Channel)를 포함한다. 단말은 PSS/SSS에 기반하여 기지국과 동기를 맞추고, 셀 ID(cell identity) 등의 정보를 획득한다. 또한, 단말은 PBCH에 기반하여 셀 내 브로드캐스트 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 한편, 단말은 초기 셀 탐색 단계에서 하향링크 참조 신호(Downlink Reference Signal, DL RS)를 수신하여 하향링크 채널 상태를 확인할 수 있다.When a terminal is powered on again from a powered-off state or enters a new cell, the terminal performs an initial cell search operation such as synchronizing with the base station in step S101. To this end, the terminal receives a Synchronization Signal Block (SSB) from the base station. The SSB includes a Primary Synchronization Signal (PSS), a Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS), and a Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH). The terminal synchronizes with the base station based on the PSS/SSS and obtains information such as a cell ID. In addition, the terminal can obtain broadcast information within the cell based on the PBCH. Meanwhile, the terminal can receive a Downlink Reference Signal (DL RS) in the initial cell search step to check the downlink channel status.

초기 셀 탐색을 마친 단말은 단계 S102에서 물리 하향링크 제어 채널(Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH) 및 물리 하향링크 제어 채널 정보에 따른 물리 하향링크 공유 채널(Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDSCH)을 수신하여 좀더 구체적인 시스템 정보를 획득할 수 있다.After completing the initial cell search, the terminal can obtain more specific system information by receiving a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) and a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) according to physical downlink control channel information in step S102.

이후, 단말은 기지국에 접속을 완료하기 위해 단계 S103 내지 단계 S106과 같은 임의 접속 과정(Random Access Procedure)을 수행할 수 있다. 이를 위해 단말은 물리 임의 접속 채널(Physical Random Access Channel, PRACH)을 통해 프리앰블(preamble)을 전송하고(S103), 물리 하향링크 제어 채널 및 이에 대응하는 물리 하향링크 공유 채널을 통해 프리앰블에 대한 응답 메시지를 수신할 수 있다(S104). 경쟁 기반 임의 접속(Contention based random access)의 경우 추가적인 물리 임의 접속 채널의 전송(S105) 및 물리 하향링크 제어 채널 및 이에 대응하는 물리 하향링크 공유 채널 수신(S106)과 같은 충돌 해결 절차(Contention Resolution Procedure)를 수행할 수 있다.Thereafter, the terminal may perform a random access procedure such as steps S103 to S106 to complete connection to the base station. To this end, the terminal may transmit a preamble through a physical random access channel (PRACH) (S103) and receive a response message to the preamble through a physical downlink control channel and a physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto (S104). In the case of contention-based random access, a contention resolution procedure such as transmission of an additional physical random access channel (S105) and reception of a physical downlink control channel and a physical downlink shared channel corresponding thereto (S106) may be performed.

상술한 바와 같은 절차를 수행한 단말은 이후 일반적인 상향/하향링크 신호 전송 절차로서 물리 하향링크 제어 채널/물리 하향링크 공유 채널 수신(S107) 및 물리 상향링크 공유 채널(Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH)/물리 상향링크 제어 채널(Physical Uplink Control Channel, PUCCH) 전송(S108)을 수행할 수 있다. 단말이 기지국으로 전송하는 제어 정보를 통칭하여 상향링크 제어 정보(Uplink Control Information, UCI)라고 지칭한다. UCI는 HARQ ACK/NACK(Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgement/Negative-ACK), SR(Scheduling Request), CSI(Channel State Information) 등을 포함한다. CSI는 CQI(Channel Quality Indicator), PMI(Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI(Rank Indication) 등을 포함한다. UCI는 일반적으로 PUCCH를 통해 전송되지만, 제어 정보와 트래픽 데이터가 동시에 전송되어야 할 경우 PUSCH를 통해 전송될 수 있다. 또한, 네트워크의 요청/지시에 의해 PUSCH를 통해 UCI를 비주기적으로 전송할 수 있다.A terminal that has performed the procedure as described above can then perform physical downlink control channel/physical downlink shared channel reception (S107) and physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH)/physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) transmission (S108) as general uplink/downlink signal transmission procedures. Control information that the terminal transmits to the base station is collectively referred to as uplink control information (UCI). UCI includes HARQ ACK/NACK (Hybrid Automatic Repeat and reQuest Acknowledgement/Negative-ACK), SR (Scheduling Request), CSI (Channel State Information), etc. CSI includes CQI (Channel Quality Indicator), PMI (Precoding Matrix Indicator), RI (Rank Indication), etc. UCI is generally transmitted through PUCCH, but can be transmitted through PUSCH when control information and traffic data must be transmitted simultaneously. Additionally, UCI can be transmitted aperiodically via PUSCH upon request/instruction from the network.

도 2는 무선 프레임(radio frame)의 구조를 예시한다. NR에서 상향링크 및 하향링크 전송은 프레임으로 구성된다. 각 무선 프레임은 10ms의 길이를 가지며, 두 개의 5ms 하프-프레임(Half-Frame, HF)으로 분할된다. 각 하프-프레임은 5개의 1ms 서브프레임(Subframe, SF)으로 분할된다. 서브프레임은 하나 이상의 슬롯으로 분할되며, 서브프레임 내 슬롯 개수는 SCS(Subcarrier Spacing)에 의존한다. 각 슬롯은 CP(cyclic prefix)에 따라 12개 또는 14개의 OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) 심볼을 포함한다. 보통(normal) CP가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 14개의 OFDM 심볼을 포함한다. 확장(extended) CP가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 12개의 OFDM 심볼을 포함한다.Figure 2 illustrates the structure of a radio frame. In NR, uplink and downlink transmissions are organized into frames. Each radio frame has a length of 10 ms and is divided into two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF). Each half-frame is divided into five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF). A subframe is divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe depends on Subcarrier Spacing (SCS). Each slot contains 12 or 14 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) symbols depending on a CP (cyclic prefix). When a normal CP is used, each slot contains 14 OFDM symbols. When an extended CP is used, each slot contains 12 OFDM symbols.

NR 시스템에서는 하나의 단말에게 병합되는 복수의 셀들간에 OFDM 뉴모놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS)가 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 이에 따라, 동일한 개수의 심볼로 구성된 시간 자원(예, SF, 슬롯 또는 TTI)(편의상, TU(Time Unit)로 통칭)의 (절대 시간) 구간이 병합된 셀들간에 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 여기서, 심볼은 OFDM 심볼 (혹은, CP-OFDM 심볼), SC-FDMA 심볼 (혹은, Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM, DFT-s-OFDM 심볼)을 포함할 수 있다. In an NR system, OFDM numerologies (e.g., SCS) may be set differently between multiple cells merged into one terminal. Accordingly, (absolute time) sections of time resources (e.g., SF, slot or TTI) (conveniently referred to as TU (Time Unit)) consisting of the same number of symbols may be set differently between the merged cells. Here, the symbols may include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA symbols (or Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM, DFT-s-OFDM symbols).

도 3은 슬롯의 자원 그리드(resource grid)를 예시한다. 슬롯은 시간 도메인에서 복수의 심볼을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 보통 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 14개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 12개의 심볼을 포함한다. 반송파는 주파수 도메인에서 복수의 부반송파를 포함한다. RB(Resource Block)는 주파수 도메인에서 복수(예, 12)의 연속한 부반송파로 정의된다. BWP(Bandwidth Part)는 주파수 도메인에서 복수의 연속한 PRB(Physical RB)로 정의되며, 하나의 뉴모놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)에 대응될 수 있다. 반송파는 최대 N개(예, 5개)의 BWP를 포함할 수 있다. 데이터 통신은 활성화된 BWP를 통해서 수행되며, 하나의 단말한테는 하나의 BWP만 활성화 될 수 있다. 자원 그리드에서 각각의 요소는 자원요소(Resource Element, RE)로 지칭되며, 하나의 복소 심볼이 맵핑될 수 있다.Fig. 3 illustrates a resource grid of a slot. A slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal CP, one slot includes 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot includes 12 symbols. A carrier includes multiple subcarriers in the frequency domain. An RB (Resource Block) is defined as multiple (e.g., 12) consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. A BWP (Bandwidth Part) is defined as multiple consecutive PRBs (Physical RBs) in the frequency domain and can correspond to one numerology (e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.). A carrier can include up to N (e.g., 5) BWPs. Data communication is performed through activated BWPs, and only one BWP can be activated for one terminal. Each element in the resource grid is referred to as a Resource Element (RE), and one complex symbol can be mapped to it.

도 4는 슬롯 내에 물리 채널이 맵핑되는 예를 도시한다. NR 시스템에서 프레임은 하나의 슬롯 내에 DL 제어 채널, DL 또는 UL 데이터, UL 제어 채널 등이 모두 포함될 수 있는 자기-완비 구조를 특징으로 한다. 예를 들어, 슬롯 내의 처음 N개의 심볼은 DL 제어 채널(예, PDCCH)을 전송하는데 사용되고(이하, DL 제어 영역), 슬롯 내의 마지막 M개의 심볼은 UL 제어 채널(예, PUCCH)을 전송하는데 사용될 수 있다(이하, UL 제어 영역). N과 M은 각각 0 이상의 정수이다. DL 제어 영역과 UL 제어 영역의 사이에 있는 자원 영역(이하, 데이터 영역)은 DL 데이터(예, PDSCH) 전송을 위해 사용되거나, UL 데이터(예, PUSCH) 전송을 위해 사용될 수 있다. GP는 기지국과 단말이 송신 모드에서 수신 모드로 전환하는 과정 또는 수신 모드에서 송신 모드로 전환하는 과정에서 시간 갭을 제공한다. 서브프레임 내에서 DL에서 UL로 전환되는 시점의 일부 심볼이 GP로 설정될 수 있다.Fig. 4 illustrates an example of mapping physical channels within a slot. In an NR system, a frame is characterized by a self-contained structure in which a DL control channel, DL or UL data, and UL control channels can all be included within one slot. For example, the first N symbols within a slot can be used to transmit a DL control channel (e.g., PDCCH) (hereinafter, referred to as a DL control region), and the last M symbols within a slot can be used to transmit a UL control channel (e.g., PUCCH) (hereinafter, referred to as a UL control region). N and M are each integers greater than or equal to 0. A resource region (hereinafter, referred to as a data region) between the DL control region and the UL control region can be used to transmit DL data (e.g., PDSCH) or UL data (e.g., PUSCH). GP provides a time gap during the process in which a base station and a terminal switch from a transmission mode to a reception mode or from a reception mode to a transmission mode. Some symbols at the time of switching from DL to UL within a subframe can be set as GP.

PDCCH는 DCI(Downlink Control Information)를 운반한다. 예를 들어, PCCCH (즉, DCI)는 DL-SCH(downlink shared channel)의 전송 포맷 및 자원 할당, UL-SCH(uplink shared channel)에 대한 자원 할당 정보, PCH(paging channel)에 대한 페이징 정보, DL-SCH 상의 시스템 정보, PDSCH 상에서 전송되는 랜덤 접속 응답과 같은 상위 계층 제어 메시지에 대한 자원 할당 정보, 전송 전력 제어 명령, CS(Configured Scheduling)의 활성화/해제 등을 나른다. DCI는 CRC(cyclic redundancy check)를 포함하며, CRC는 PDCCH의 소유자 또는 사용 용도에 따라 다양한 식별자(예, Radio Network Temporary Identifier, RNTI)로 마스킹/스크램블 된다. 예를 들어, PDCCH가 특정 단말을 위한 것이면, CRC는 단말 식별자(예, Cell-RNTI, C-RNTI)로 마스킹 된다. PDCCH가 페이징에 관한 것이면, CRC는 P-RNTI(Paging-RNTI)로 마스킹 된다. PDCCH가 시스템 정보(예, System Information Block, SIB)에 관한 것이면, CRC는 SI-RNTI(System Information RNTI)로 마스킹 된다. PDCCH가 랜덤 접속 응답에 관한 것이면, CRC는 RA-RNTI(Random Access-RNTI)로 마스킹 된다.The PDCCH carries DCI (Downlink Control Information). For example, the PCCCH (i.e., DCI) carries the transmission format and resource allocation of the DL-SCH (downlink shared channel), resource allocation information for the UL-SCH (uplink shared channel), paging information for the PCH (paging channel), system information on the DL-SCH, resource allocation information for upper layer control messages such as random access response transmitted on the PDSCH, transmission power control commands, activation/release of Configured Scheduling (CS), etc. The DCI includes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC), and the CRC is masked/scrambled with various identifiers (e.g., Radio Network Temporary Identifier, RNTI) depending on the owner or usage of the PDCCH. For example, if the PDCCH is for a specific terminal, the CRC is masked with a terminal identifier (e.g., Cell-RNTI, C-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for paging, the CRC is masked with the Paging-RNTI (P-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for system information (e.g., System Information Block, SIB), the CRC is masked with the System Information RNTI (SI-RNTI). If the PDCCH is for random access response, the CRC is masked with the Random Access-RNTI (RA-RNTI).

도 5는 PDSCH 수신 및 ACK/NACK 전송 과정을 예시한다. 도 5울 참조하면, 단말은 슬롯 #n에서 PDCCH를 검출할 수 있다. 여기서, PDCCH는 하향링크 스케줄링 정보(예, DCI 포맷 1_0, 1_1)를 포함하며, PDCCH는 DL assignment-to-PDSCH offset (K0)과 PDSCH-HARQ-ACK reporting offset (K1)를 나타낸다. 단말은 슬롯 #n의 스케줄링 정보에 따라 슬롯 #(n+K0)에서부터 PDSCH를 수신한 뒤, 슬롯 #n1(where, n+K0≤ n1)에서 PDSCH의 수신이 끝나면 슬롯 #(n1+K1)에서 PUCCH를 통해 UCI를 전송할 수 있다. 여기서, UCI는 PDSCH에 대한 HARQ-ACK 응답을 포함할 수 있다. PDSCH가 최대 1개 TB를 전송하도록 구성된 경우, HARQ-ACK 응답은 1-비트로 구성될 수 있다. PDSCH가 최대 2개의 TB를 전송하도록 구성된 경우, HARQ-ACK 응답은 공간(spatial) 번들링이 구성되지 않은 경우 2-비트로 구성되고, 공간 번들링이 구성된 경우 1-비트로 구성될 수 있다. 복수의 PDSCH에 대한 HARQ-ACK 전송 시점이 슬롯 #(n+K1)로 지정된 경우, 슬롯 #(n+K1)에서 전송되는 UCI는 복수의 PDSCH에 대한 HARQ-ACK 응답을 포함한다.Fig. 5 illustrates a process of receiving PDSCH and transmitting ACK/NACK. Referring to Fig. 5, a UE can detect a PDCCH in slot #n. Here, the PDCCH includes downlink scheduling information (e.g., DCI format 1_0, 1_1), and the PDCCH indicates a DL assignment-to-PDSCH offset (K0) and a PDSCH-HARQ-ACK reporting offset (K1). The UE receives a PDSCH from slot #(n+K0) according to the scheduling information of slot #n, and then, when reception of the PDSCH is finished in slot #n1 (where, n+K0≤ n1), the UE can transmit a UCI through PUCCH in slot #(n1+K1). Here, the UCI can include a HARQ-ACK response to the PDSCH. If the PDSCH is configured to transmit up to 1 TB, the HARQ-ACK response can be configured with 1 bit. When PDSCH is configured to transmit up to 2 TB, HARQ-ACK response may consist of 2 bits if spatial bundling is not configured, and 1 bit if spatial bundling is configured. When HARQ-ACK transmission timing for multiple PDSCHs is designated as slot #(n+K1), UCI transmitted in slot #(n+K1) includes HARQ-ACK responses for multiple PDSCHs.

도 6은 PUSCH 전송 과정을 예시한다. 도 6을 참조하면, 단말은 슬롯 #n에서 PDCCH를 검출할 수 있다. 여기서, PDCCH는 상향링크 스케줄링 정보(예, DCI 포맷 0_0, 0_1)를 포함한다. 단말은 슬롯 #n의 스케줄링 정보에 따라 슬롯 #(n+K2)에서 PUSCH를 전송할 수 있다. 여기서, PUSCH는 UL-SCH TB를 포함한다.Figure 6 illustrates a PUSCH transmission process. Referring to Figure 6, a terminal can detect a PDCCH in slot #n. Here, the PDCCH includes uplink scheduling information (e.g., DCI format 0_0, 0_1). The terminal can transmit a PUSCH in slot #(n+K2) according to the scheduling information of slot #n. Here, the PUSCH includes a UL-SCH TB.

RedCap (Reduced Capability) 단말RedCap (Reduced Capability) terminal

최근 5G 주요 사용 케이스 (main use case)들 (mMTC, eMBB 그리고 URLLC) 외에, mMTC와 eMBB, 또는 mMTC와 URLLC에 걸친 사용 케이스 영역에 대한 중요도/관심도가 높아지고 있으며, 그에 따라서 이러한 사용 케이스 들을 장치 비용, 전력 소비, 폼 팩터 (device cost, power consumption, form factor) 등의 관점에서 효율적으로 지원하기 위한 단말기의 필요성이 증가되고 있다. 이러한 목적의 단말기를 (NR) RedCap (reduced capability) UE/장치로 정의할 수 있다. 또한, RedCap 장치와 구분해서 5G main use case들을 모두 또는 그 중의 하나 이상을 지원하는 일반적인 NR 단말기는 NR (normal) UE/장치 또는 non-RedCap UE/장치로 정의될 수 있다. Redcap UE는 낮은 장치 비용/복잡성, 낮은 전력 소비, 소형 폼 팩터 (low device cost/complexity, low power consumption, small form factor) 등의 전부 또는 일부를 달성하기 위해서 IMT-2020에서 정의하는 5G key capabilities (최고 데이터 전송률, 사용자 경험 데이터 전송률, 대기 시간, 이동성, 연결 밀도, 에너지 효율성, 스펙트럼 효율성, 지역 트래픽 효율성) 중 일부 capability를 의도적으로 reduction 시킨 단말일 수 있다.In addition to the main use cases of 5G (mMTC, eMBB and URLLC), the importance/interest in use cases spanning mMTC and eMBB, or mMTC and URLLC, is increasing, and accordingly, the need for terminals that efficiently support these use cases in terms of device cost, power consumption, form factor, etc. is increasing. A terminal for this purpose can be defined as a (NR) RedCap (reduced capability) UE/device. In addition, a general NR terminal that supports all or one or more of the 5G main use cases, distinct from a RedCap device, can be defined as a NR (normal) UE/device or a non-RedCap UE/device. Redcap UE may be a terminal that intentionally reduces some of the 5G key capabilities (peak data rate, user experience data rate, latency, mobility, connection density, energy efficiency, spectral efficiency, and regional traffic efficiency) defined in IMT-2020 in order to achieve all or part of the low device cost/complexity, low power consumption, and small form factor.

Redcap 장치의 타겟 사용 케이스들인 mMTC와 eMBB, 또는 mMTC와 URLLC에 걸친 5G 사용 케이스의 영역을 편의상 redcap use case 들로 칭한다. Redcap use case 들은 예를 들어 다음과 같을 수 있다.The target use cases of Redcap devices, which are 5G use cases spanning mMTC and eMBB, or mMTC and URLLC, are conveniently referred to as redcap use cases. Redcap use cases can include, for example:

(1) 연결된 산업(1) Connected industries

1) 센서와 액츄에이터는 5G 네트워크와 코어에 연결될 수 있다.1) Sensors and actuators can be connected to 5G networks and cores.

- 대규모 IWSN(산업용 무선 센서 네트워크) 사용 사례 및 요구 사항 포함- Includes large-scale IWSN (industrial wireless sensor networks) use cases and requirements

- 요구 사항이 매우 높은 URLLC 서비스뿐만 아니라 배터리 수명이 수년에 달하는 소형 장치 폼 팩터를 요구하는 상대적으로 저가형 서비스- Relatively low-cost services that require small device form factors with battery lifespans of several years, as well as URLLC services that have very high requirements.

- 해당 서비스에 대한 요구 사항은 LPWA(Low Power Wide Area, 즉 LTE-M/NB-IOT)보다 높지만 URLCC 및 eMBB보다 낮음.- The requirements for the service are higher than LPWA (Low Power Wide Area, i.e. LTE-M/NB-IOT), but lower than URLCC and eMBB.

- 이러한 환경에 있는 장치에는 다음이 포함됨. 압력 센서, 습도 센서, 온도계, 모션 센서, 가속도계, 액추에이터 등- Devices in this environment include: pressure sensors, humidity sensors, thermometers, motion sensors, accelerometers, actuators, etc.

2) 스마트시티2) Smart City

- 스마트 시티 수직 분야에는 도시 자원을 보다 효율적으로 모니터링 및 제어하고 도시 거주자에게 서비스를 제공하기 위한 데이터 수집 및 처리가 포함됨. 특히, 감시카메라 배치는 스마트시티는 물론 공장, 산업현장에서도 필수적인 부분임.- The smart city vertical involves data collection and processing to more efficiently monitor and control urban resources and provide services to city residents. In particular, surveillance camera deployment is an essential part of smart cities as well as factories and industrial sites.

3) 웨어러블3) Wearable

- 웨어러블 사용 사례에는 스마트 시계, 반지, eHealth 관련 장치, 의료 모니터링 장치 등이 포함될 수 있음. 유스 케이스의 한 가지 특징은 장치의 크기가 작다는 것임.- Wearable use cases may include smart watches, rings, eHealth-related devices, medical monitoring devices, etc. One characteristic of the use cases is the small size of the devices.

SRS (sounding reference signal)SRS (sounding reference signal)

SRS는 단말이 전송하고 기지국이 수신하는 UL reference signal로, 기지국은 SRS을 바탕으로 link adaptation, channel reciprocity 특성을 이용한 DL channel estimation, UL beam management, UL precoding, 그리고/또는 UL measurement를 취득 등을 수행할 수 있다. SRS is a UL reference signal transmitted by the terminal and received by the base station. Based on SRS, the base station can perform link adaptation, DL channel estimation using channel reciprocity characteristics, UL beam management, UL precoding, and/or UL measurement.

단말은 기지국이 제공하는 SRS configuration 정보 (e.g., TS38.331 SRS-Config IE)를 수신하고 이에 기반하여 SRS 전송을 위한 parameter들을 결정할 수 있다. SRS의 configuration은 SRS-Resources, SRS-PosResources, SRS-ResourceSets, 그리고 SRS-PosResourcesets의 리스트로 구성되어 있으며, 이 때 SRS-ResourceSets, 그리고 SRS-PosResourcesets은 각각 SRS-Resources와 SRS-PosResources의 set을 포함한다. The terminal can receive SRS configuration information (e.g., TS38.331 SRS-Config IE) provided by the base station and determine parameters for SRS transmission based on the information. The SRS configuration consists of a list of SRS-Resources, SRS-PosResources, SRS-ResourceSets, and SRS-PosResourcesets, where SRS-ResourceSets and SRS-PosResourcesets each include a set of SRS-Resources and SRS-PosResources.

SRS는 시간 자원의 설정 및 전송 방식에 따라 3가지 resource type으로 구분될 수 있다.SRS can be divided into three resource types depending on the setting and transmission method of time resources.

Resource type이 periodic으로 설정된 SRS의 경우, 단말은 RRC로 설정 받은 SRS 자원을 configure 받은 주기와 offset에 기반하여 SRS resource가 전송되는 위치를 결정하고 설정 받은 경우 별도의 시그널링 없이 SRS를 주기적으로 전송한다. In the case of SRS where the resource type is set to periodic, the terminal determines the location where the SRS resource is transmitted based on the configured period and offset of the SRS resource set by RRC, and if configured, transmits the SRS periodically without separate signaling.

Resource type이 semi-persistent로 설정된 SRS의 경우, 단말은 RRC로 설정 받은 SRS 자원을 configure 받은 주기와 offset에 기반하여 SRS resource가 전송되는 위치를 결정하고 이후 MAC CE에 의하여 SRS의 전송이 activation 된 경우 지시된 SRS의 주기적인 전송을 시작한다. MAC CE에 의하여 deactivation 된 경우 단말은 SRS의 전송을 중단한다. For SRS with resource type set to semi-persistent, the terminal determines the location where the SRS resource is transmitted based on the configured period and offset of the SRS resource set by RRC, and then starts periodic transmission of the indicated SRS if the transmission of the SRS is activated by MAC CE. If deactivated by MAC CE, the terminal stops transmitting the SRS.

Resource type이 aperiodic으로 설정된 SRS의 경우, 단말은 해당 SRS resource set에 대한 triggering을 지시하는 DCI의 수신 시점을 기준으로 RRC로 설정된 offset의 위치를 반영하여 지시된 SRS를 전송한다. For SRS with the resource type set to aperiodic, the terminal transmits the indicated SRS by reflecting the position of the offset set by RRC based on the time of reception of DCI indicating triggering for the corresponding SRS resource set.

PositioningPositioning

측위(Positioning)는 무선 신호를 측정하여 사용자 기기(user equipment, UE)의 지리적 위치 및/또는 속도를 결정하는 것을 의미할 수 있다. 위치 정보는 UE와 관련된 클라이언트(예를 들어, 어플리케이션)에 의해 요청되어, 상기 클라이언트에 보고될 수 있다. 또한, 상기 위치 정보는 코어 네트워크(Core Network) 내에 포함되거나, 상기 코어 네트워크와 접속된 클라이언트에 의해 요청될 수도 있다. 상기 위치 정보는 셀 기반 또는 지리적 좌표와 같은 표준 형식(standard format)으로 보고될 수 있으며, 이 때, 상기 UE의 위치 및 속도에 대한 추정 오류치 및/또는 측위(Positioning)에 사용된 측위 방법을 함께 보고 할 수 있다. Positioning may mean determining a geographic location and/or velocity of a user equipment (UE) by measuring radio signals. The position information may be requested by a client (e.g., an application) associated with the UE and reported to the client. Additionally, the position information may be included in a core network or may be requested by a client connected to the core network. The position information may be reported in a standard format, such as cell-based or geographic coordinates, and in this case, an estimated error value for the position and velocity of the UE and/or a positioning method used for positioning may be reported together.

도 7 은 단말의 위치를 측정하기 위한 포지셔닝 프로토콜 설정(positioning protocol configuration)의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 7 is a diagram showing an example of a positioning protocol configuration for measuring the position of a terminal.

도 7 을 참조하면, LPP 는 하나 이상의 기준 소스 (reference source) 로부터 획득된 측위-관련 측정 (position-related measurements) 를 사용하여 대상 장치 (UE 및/또는 SET) 를 측위할 수 있도록 위치 서버 (E-SMLC 및/또는 SLP 및/또는 LMF) 와 대상 장치 사이의 point-to-point 로 사용될 수 있다. LPP 를 통하여 타겟 장치 및 위치 서버는 신호 A 및/또는 신호 B 에 기초한 측정 및/또는 위치 정보를 교환할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 7, LPP can be used as a point-to-point between a location server (E-SMLC and/or SLP and/or LMF) and a target device to position the target device (UE and/or SET) using position-related measurements acquired from one or more reference sources. Through LPP, the target device and the location server can exchange measurement and/or location information based on Signal A and/or Signal B.

NRPPa는 기준 소스 (ACCESS NODE 및/또는BS 및/또는 TP 및/또는 NG-RAN 노드) 와 위치 서버 간의 정보 교환에 사용될 수 있다. NRPPa can be used to exchange information between a reference source (ACCESS NODE and/or BS and/or TP and/or NG-RAN node) and a location server.

NRPPa 프로토콜이 제공하는 기능 (function) 들은 하기 사항들을 포함할 수 있다:Functions provided by the NRPPa protocol may include:

- E-CID Location Information Transfer. 이 기능을 통하여 E-CID 포지셔닝 목적으로 기준 소스와 LMF 간에 위치 정보가 교환될 수 있다.- E-CID Location Information Transfer. This function allows location information to be exchanged between the reference source and the LMF for E-CID positioning purposes.

- OTDOA Information Transfer. 이 기능을 통하여 OTDOA 포지셔닝 목적으로 기준 소스와 LMF 간에 정보가 교환될 수 있다.- OTDOA Information Transfer. This function allows information to be exchanged between the reference source and the LMF for OTDOA positioning purposes.

- Reporting of General Error Situations. 이 기능을 통하여 기능 별 오류 메시지가 정의되지 않은 일반적인 오류 상황이 보고될 수 있다.- Reporting of General Error Situations. This feature allows reporting of general error situations for which no function-specific error messages are defined.

NG-RAN에서 지원하는 측위 방법들에는 GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), OTDOA, E-CID (enhanced cell ID), 기압 센서 측위, WLAN 측위, 블루투스 측위 및 TBS (terrestrial beacon system), UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival) 등이 있을 수 있다. 상기 측위 방법들 중, 어느 하나의 측위 방법을 이용하여 UE의 위치를 측정할 수도 있지만, 둘 이상의 측위 방법을 이용하여 UE의 위치를 측정할 수도 있다.The positioning methods supported by NG-RAN may include GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System), OTDOA, E-CID (enhanced cell ID), barometric sensor positioning, WLAN positioning, Bluetooth positioning, and terrestrial beacon system (TBS), UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival), etc. Among the above positioning methods, the position of the UE may be measured using any one of the positioning methods, but the position of the UE may also be measured using two or more positioning methods.

OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival)OTDOA (Observed Time Difference Of Arrival)

도 8은 OTDOA (observed time difference of arrival) 측위(Positioning) 방법의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 8 is a diagram showing an example of an OTDOA (observed time difference of arrival) positioning method.

OTDOA 측위 방법은 UE가 eNB, ng-eNB 및 PRS 전용 TP를 포함하는 다수의 TP들로부터 수신된 하향링크 신호들의 측정 타이밍을 이용한다. UE는 위치 서버로부터 수신된 위치 보조 데이터를 이용하여 수신된 하향링크 신호들의 타이밍을 측정한다. 그리고 이러한 측정 결과 및 이웃 TP들의 지리적 좌표들을 기반으로 UE의 위치를 결정할 수 있다.The OTDOA positioning method uses the timing of measurements of downlink signals received from multiple TPs, including eNB, ng-eNB, and PRS-only TPs. The UE measures the timing of the received downlink signals using location assistance data received from a location server. Based on these measurement results and the geographical coordinates of neighboring TPs, the location of the UE can be determined.

gNB에 연결된 UE는 TP로부터 OTDOA 측정을 위한 측정 갭(gap)을 요청할 수 있다. 만약, UE가 OTDOA 보조 데이터 내의 적어도 하나의 TP를 위한 SFN을 인지하지 못하면, UE는 RSTD (Reference Signal Time Difference) 측정(Measurement)을 수행하기 위한 측정 갭을 요청하기 전에 OTDOA 참조 셀(reference cell)의 SFN을 획득하기 위해 자율적인 갭(autonomous gap)을 사용할 수 있다. A UE connected to a gNB can request a measurement gap for OTDOA measurements from a TP. If the UE is not aware of an SFN for at least one TP in the OTDOA assistance data, the UE can use an autonomous gap to obtain the SFN of the OTDOA reference cell before requesting a measurement gap to perform Reference Signal Time Difference (RSTD) measurements.

여기서, RSTD는 참조 셀과 측정 셀로부터 각각 수신된 2개의 서브프레임들의 경계 간의 가장 작은 상대적인 시간 차를 기반으로 정의될 수 있다. 즉, 측정 셀로부터 수신된 서브 프레임의 시작 시간에 가장 가까운 참조 셀의 서브프레임의 시작 시간 간의 상대적인 시간 차이를 기반으로 계산될 수 있다. 한편, 참조 셀은 UE에 의해 선택될 수 있다.Here, RSTD can be defined based on the smallest relative time difference between the boundaries of two subframes received from the reference cell and the measurement cell, respectively. That is, it can be calculated based on the relative time difference between the start time of the subframe of the reference cell that is closest to the start time of the subframe received from the measurement cell. Meanwhile, the reference cell can be selected by the UE.

정확한 OTDOA 측정을 위해서는 지리적으로 분산된 3개 이상의 TP들 또는 기지국들로부터 수신된 신호의 TOA(time of arrival)을 측정하는 것이 필요하다. 예를 들어, TP 1, TP 2 및 TP 3 각각에 대한 TOA를 측정하고, 3개의 TOA를 기반으로 TP 1-TP 2에 대한 RSTD, TP 2-TP 3에 대한 RSTD 및 TP 3-TP 1에 대한 RSTD를 계산하여, 이를 기반으로 기하학적 쌍곡선을 결정하고, 이러한 쌍곡선이 교차하는 지점을 UE의 위치로 추청할 수 있다. 이 때, 각 TOA 측정에 대한 정확도 및/또는 불확실성이 생길 수 있는 바, 추정된 UE의 위치는 측정 불확실성에 따른 특정 범위로 알려질 수도 있다.For accurate OTDOA measurement, it is necessary to measure the time of arrival (TOA) of signals received from three or more geographically distributed TPs or base stations. For example, TOAs for TP 1, TP 2, and TP 3 are measured respectively, and RSTD for TP 1-TP 2, RSTD for TP 2-TP 3, and RSTD for TP 3-TP 1 are calculated based on the three TOAs, and a geometric hyperbola is determined based on these, and the point where these hyperbolas intersect can be estimated as the position of the UE. At this time, since there may be accuracy and/or uncertainty for each TOA measurement, the estimated position of the UE may be known within a certain range according to the measurement uncertainty.

E-CID (Enhanced Cell ID)E-CID (Enhanced Cell ID)

셀 ID (CID) 측위 방법에서, UE의 위치는 UE의 서빙 ng-eNB, 서빙 gNB 및/또는 서빙 셀의 지리적 정보를 통해 측정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 서빙 ng-eNB, 서빙 gNB 및/또는 서빙 셀의 지리적 정보는 페이징(paging), 등록(registration) 등을 통해 획득될 수 있다.In the Cell ID (CID) positioning method, the location of the UE can be measured through geographic information of the serving ng-eNB, serving gNB, and/or serving cell of the UE. For example, the geographic information of the serving ng-eNB, serving gNB, and/or serving cell can be obtained through paging, registration, etc.

한편, E-CID 측위 방법은 CID 측위 방법에 더하여 UE 위치 추정치를 향상 시키기 위한 추가적인 UE 측정 및/또는 NG-RAN 무선 자원 등을 이용할 수 있다. E-CID 측위 방법에서, RRC 프로토콜의 측정 제어 시스템과 동일한 측정 방법들 중 일부를 사용할 수 있지만, 일반적으로 UE의 위치 측정만을 위하여 추가적인 측정을 하지 않는다. 다시 말해, UE의 위치를 측정하기 위하여 별도의 측정 설정 (measurement configuration) 또는 측정 제어 메시지(measurement control message)는 제공되지 않을 수 있으며, UE 또한 위치 측정만을 위한 추가적인 측정 동작이 요청될 것을 기대하지 않고, UE가 일반적으로 측정 가능한 측정 방법들을 통해 획득된 측정 값을 보고할 수 있다.Meanwhile, the E-CID positioning method may utilize additional UE measurements and/or NG-RAN radio resources, in addition to the CID positioning method, to improve the UE position estimation. In the E-CID positioning method, some of the same measurement methods as the measurement control system of the RRC protocol may be used, but generally, additional measurements are not performed only for position measurement of the UE. In other words, a separate measurement configuration or measurement control message may not be provided to measure the position of the UE, and the UE also does not expect to be requested to perform additional measurement operations only for position measurement, and may report measurement values acquired through measurement methods that the UE can generally measure.

예를 들어, 서빙 gNB는 UE로부터 제공되는 E-UTRA 측정치를 사용하여 E-CID 측위 방법을 구현할 수 있다.For example, a serving gNB can implement an E-CID location method using E-UTRA measurements provided from the UE.

E-CID 측위를 위해 사용할 수 있는 측정 요소의 예를 들면 다음과 같을 수 있다.Examples of measurement elements that can be used for E-CID positioning include:

- UE 측정: E-UTRA RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), E-UTRA RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), UE E-UTRA 수신-송신 시간차 (Rx-Tx Time difference), GERAN/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication), UTRAN CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) RSCP (Received Signal Code Power), UTRAN CPICH Ec/Io - UE measurements: E-UTRA RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power), E-UTRA RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality), UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time difference, GERAN/WLAN RSSI (Reference Signal Strength Indication), UTRAN CPICH (Common Pilot Channel) RSCP (Received Signal Code Power), UTRAN CPICH Ec/Io

- E-UTRAN 측정: ng-eNB 수신-송신 시간차 (Rx-Tx Time difference), 타이밍 어드밴스 (Timing Advance; TADV), Angle of Arrival (AoA) - E-UTRAN measurements: ng-eNB Rx-Tx Time difference, Timing Advance (T ADV ), Angle of Arrival (AoA)

여기서, TADV는 아래와 같이 Type 1과 Type 2로 구분될 수 있다.Here, T ADV can be divided into Type 1 and Type 2 as follows.

TADV Type 1 = (ng-eNB 수신-송신 시간차)+(UE E-UTRA 수신-송신 시간차)T ADV Type 1 = (ng-eNB Rx-Tx Time Difference)+(UE E-UTRA Rx-Tx Time Difference)

TADV Type 2 = ng-eNB 수신-송신 시간차T ADV Type 2 = ng-eNB receive-transmit time difference

한편, AoA는 UE의 방향을 측정하는데 사용될 수 있다. AoA는 기지국/TP로부터 반 시계 방향으로 UE의 위치에 대한 추정 각도로 정의될 수 있다. 이 때, 지리적 기준 방향은 북쪽일 수 있다. 기지국/TP는 AoA 측정을 위해 SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) 및/또는 DMRS (Demodulation Reference Signal)과 같은 상향링크 신호를 이용할 수 있다. 또한, 안테나 어레이의 배열이 클수록 AoA의 측정 정확도가 높아지며, 동일한 간격으로 안테나 어레이들이 배열된 경우, 인접한 안테나 소자들에서 수신된 신호들은 일정한 위상 변화(Phase-Rotate)를 가질 수 있다.Meanwhile, AoA can be used to measure the direction of the UE. AoA can be defined as an estimated angle for the position of the UE in a counterclockwise direction from the base station/TP. In this case, the geographical reference direction can be north. The base station/TP can use an uplink signal such as a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) and/or a Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) for AoA measurement. In addition, the larger the array of antenna arrays, the higher the measurement accuracy of AoA, and when the antenna arrays are arranged at equal intervals, the signals received from adjacent antenna elements can have a constant phase change (Phase-Rotate).

UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival)UTDOA (Uplink Time Difference of Arrival)

UTDOA는 SRS의 도달 시간을 추정하여 UE의 위치를 결정하는 방법이다. 추정된 SRS 도달 시간을 산출할 때, 서빙 셀을 참조 셀로 사용하여, 다른 셀 (혹은 기지국/TP)와의 도달 시간 차이를 통해 UE의 위치를 추정할 수 있다. UTDOA를 구현하기 위해 E-SMLC는 타겟 UE에게 SRS 전송을 지시하기 위해, 타겟 UE의 서빙 셀을 지시할 수 있다. 또한, E-SMLC는 SRS의 주기적/비주기적 여부, 대역폭 및 주파수/그룹/시퀀스 호핑 등과 같은 설정(Configuration)을 제공할 수 있다.UTDOA is a method to determine the location of a UE by estimating the arrival time of an SRS. When calculating the estimated SRS arrival time, the serving cell is used as a reference cell, and the location of the UE can be estimated through the difference in arrival times with other cells (or base stations/TPs). To implement UTDOA, the E-SMLC can indicate the serving cell of the target UE to instruct the target UE to transmit SRS. In addition, the E-SMLC can provide configurations such as whether the SRS is periodic/aperiodic, bandwidth, and frequency/group/sequence hopping.

Multi RTT (round trip time)Multi RTT (round trip time)

도 9는 Multi RTT (round trip time) 측위 방법의 일 예를 나타낸 도면이다.Figure 9 is a diagram showing an example of a Multi RTT (round trip time) positioning method.

도 9 (a)를 참조하면, initiating device 와 responding device 에서 TOA 측정이 수행되고, responding device 가 RTT 측정 (계산) 을 위하여 initiating device) 에 TOA 측정을 제공하는 RTT 과정을 예시한다. 예를 들어, initiating device 는 TRP 및/또는 단말일 수 있고, responding device 는 단말 및/또는 TRP 일 수 있다.Referring to Fig. 9 (a), an RTT process is illustrated in which a TOA measurement is performed by an initiating device and a responding device, and the responding device provides the TOA measurement to the initiating device for RTT measurement (calculation). For example, the initiating device may be a TRP and/or a terminal, and the responding device may be a terminal and/or a TRP.

initiating device 는 RTT 측정 요청을 송신하고, responding device 는 이를 수신할 수 있다 (1301). The initiating device transmits an RTT measurement request, and the responding device can receive it (1301).

initiating device 는 RTT 측정 신호를 t0 에서 송신할 수 있고, responding device 는 TOA 측정 t1 을 획득할 수 있다 (1303).The initiating device can transmit the RTT measurement signal at t 0 , and the responding device can obtain the TOA measurement t 1 (1303).

responding device 는 RTT 측정 신호를 t2 에서 송신할 수 있고, initiating device 는 TOA 측정 t3 을 획득할 수 있다 (1305).The responding device can transmit the RTT measurement signal at t 2 , and the initiating device can obtain the TOA measurement t 3 (1305).

responding device 는 [t2-t1] 에 대한 정보를 송신할 수 있고, initiating device 는 해당 정보를 수신하여, RTT 를 계산할 수 있다 (1307). 해당 정보는 별개 신호에 기초하여 송수신될 수도 있고, RTT 측정 신호(1305)에 포함되어 송수신될 수도 있다.The responding device can transmit information about [t 2 -t 1 ], and the initiating device can receive the information and calculate the RTT (1307). The information can be transmitted and received based on a separate signal, or can be transmitted and received while being included in the RTT measurement signal (1305).

도 9 (b) 을 참조하면, 해당 RTT 는 두 디바이스 간의 double-range 측정과 대응할 수 있다. 해당 정보로부터 측위 추정 (positioning estimation) 이 수행될 수 있다. 측정된 RTT 에 기반하여 d1, d2, d3 가 결정될 수 있으며, 각 BS1, BS2, BS3 (또는 TRP) 를 중심으로 하고 각 d1, d2, d3 를 반지름으로 하는 원주의 교차점으로 target device location 이 결정될 수 있다.Referring to Fig. 9 (b), the RTT can correspond to a double-range measurement between two devices. Positioning estimation can be performed from the information. Based on the measured RTT, d 1 , d 2 , and d 3 can be determined, and the target device location can be determined as the intersection of circles centered at each of BS 1 , BS 2 , and BS 3 (or TRP) and having each of d 1 , d 2 , and d 3 as a radius.

NG-RAN positioning architecture and proceduresNG-RAN positioning architecture and procedures

도 10은 NG(next generation) RAN (radio access network)의 positioning 구조를 도시한다. NR RAN은 NR RAN 또는 5G RAN으로 지칭될 수 있다.Figure 10 illustrates the positioning structure of a next generation (NG) RAN (radio access network). The NR RAN may be referred to as NR RAN or 5G RAN.

AMF는 다른 개체(예: GMLC 또는 UE)로부터 특정 타겟 UE와 관련된 일부 위치 서비스에 대한 요청을 수신하거나 AMF 자체가 특정 타겟 UE를 대신하여 일부 위치 서비스를 시작하기로 결정할 수 있다(예: IMS 긴급 통화의 경우). 이후 AMF는 LMF에 위치 서비스 요청을 송신할 수 있다. LMF는 위치 서비스 요청을 처리할 수 있으며, 위치 서비스 요청의 처리는 UE-based 및/또는 UE-assisted 포지셔닝을 위해 assistance data를 타겟 UE에 전송 및/또는 타겟 UE의 포지셔닝을 포함할 수 있다. LMF는 위치 서비스 결과(e.g., UE에 대한 위치 추정치)를 AMF로 송신한다. AMF가 아닌 다른 개체(e.g., GMLC 또는 UE)가 요청한 위치 서비스의 경우, AMF는 위치 서비스 결과를 해당 엔터티에 송신한다.The AMF may receive a request for some location services related to a particular target UE from another entity (e.g., a GMLC or a UE) or the AMF itself may decide to initiate some location services on behalf of a particular target UE (e.g., in case of an IMS emergency call). The AMF may then send a location service request to the LMF. The LMF may process the location service request, and the processing of the location service request may include sending assistance data to the target UE for UE-based and/or UE-assisted positioning and/or positioning of the target UE. The LMF sends the location service result (e.g., a position estimate for the UE) to the AMF. For location services requested by an entity other than the AMF (e.g., a GMLC or a UE), the AMF sends the location service result to that entity.

NG-RAN 노드는 PRS 기반 TBS 지원을 위해 RRM 또는 DL-PRS only TP 등의 TRP/TP들을 제어할 수 있다.NG-RAN nodes can control TRPs/TPs such as RRM or DL-PRS only TP to support PRS-based TBS.

LMF는 UTRAN 정보에 액세스하기 위하여 E-SMLCt와 연결될 수 있다. LMF can be connected to E-SMLCt to access UTRAN information.

LMF는 SLP와 연결될 수 있는데, SLP는 사용자 평면에 대한 위치 지정을 담당한다.LMF can be connected to SLP, which is responsible for positioning with respect to the user plane.

도 11은 NG-RAN에 의해 지원되는 위치 서비스의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 11 illustrates an example of location services supported by NG-RAN.

UE가 CM-IDLE 상태인 경우 AMF가 Location Service Request를 수신하면, UE와의 연결 및 특정 서빙 gNB/ng-eNB의 할당을 위하여, AMF는 시그널링을 설정하기 위해 네트워크 트리거 서비스 요청을 수행한다. 도 11에서 UE는 연결 모드에 있다고 가정한다.When AMF receives a Location Service Request while UE is in CM-IDLE state, AMF performs a network triggered service request to establish signaling for connection with UE and allocation of specific serving gNB/ng-eNB. In Fig. 11, it is assumed that UE is in connected mode.

UE에 대한 위치 서비스 요청이 트리거될 수 있으며, UE에 대한 위치 서비스 요청은 1101, 1102 또는 1103 중 어느 하나 일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 5GC의 엔터티(예: GMLC)는 대상 UE에 대한 일부 위치 서비스(예: 포지셔닝)를 서빙 AMF에 요청하거나 (1101), 또는 서빙 AMF가 타겟 UE에 대한 일부 위치 서비스(예: 긴급 통화를 위해 UE를 찾기 위해)를 스스로 트리거하거나 (1102) 또는 UE는 NAS 레벨에서 서빙 AMF에 일부 위치 서비스(예: 포지셔닝 또는 assistance data 전달)를 요청할 수 있다 (1103).A location service request for the UE may be triggered, and the location service request for the UE may be any one of 1101, 1102 or 1103. For example, an entity of 5GC (e.g., GMLC) may request some location service (e.g., positioning) for the target UE to the serving AMF (1101), or the serving AMF may trigger some location service (e.g., to locate the UE for an emergency call) for the target UE itself (1102), or the UE may request some location service (e.g., positioning or assistance data forwarding) to the serving AMF at NAS level (1103).

AMF는 위치 서비스 요청을 LMF로 전달한다 (1104).AMF forwards the location service request to LMF (1104).

LMF는 위치 측정 또는 assistance data를 획득하기 위해 NG-RAN에서 서비스를 제공하고 근처에 있는 ng-eNB/gNB와 포지셔닝 절차를 시작한다(1105).LMF provides services to NG-RAN to obtain location measurement or assistance data and initiates a positioning procedure with nearby ng-eNB/gNB (1105).

(1105 단계 대신 또는 추가로) LMF는 위치 추정 또는 포지셔닝 측정을 얻거나 위치 assistance data를 UE에 전송하기 위해 UE와 포지셔닝 절차를 시작한다(1106).(Instead of or in addition to step 1105) the LMF initiates a positioning procedure with the UE to obtain a position estimate or positioning measurement or to transmit position assistance data to the UE (1106).

LMF는 AMF에 위치 서비스 응답을 제공한다 (1107) (e.g., 성공 또는 실패 표시 및 요청 및 획득된 경우 UE에 대한 위치 추정).The LMF provides a location service response to the AMF (1107) (e.g., success or failure indication and a position estimate for the UE if requested and obtained).

(1101의 경우) AMF는 5GC 엔터티에 위치 서비스 응답을 제공한다(1108) (e.g., UE에 대한 위치 추정).(For 1101) AMF provides a location service response to the 5GC entity (1108) (e.g., position estimation for the UE).

(1102의 경우), AMF는 단계 1107에서 수신된 위치 서비스 응답을 사용하여 단계 1102에서 이를 트리거한 서비스를 지원한다(1109) (e.g., 긴급 통화와 관련된 위치 추정을 GMLC에 제공).(For 1102), AMF uses the location service response received in step 1107 to support the service triggered in step 1102 (1109) (e.g., providing location estimates related to emergency calls to GMLC).

(1103의 경우) AMF는 위치 서비스 응답을 UE에 제공한다(1110) (e.g., UE에 대한 위치 추정).(For 1103) AMF provides a location service response to the UE (1110) (e.g., position estimation for the UE).

SRS (sounding reference signal) for positioningSRS (sounding reference signal) for positioning

Rel. 15 NR 시스템에서는 기지국의 UL RTOA (UL-Relative Time of Arrival), UL SRS-RSRP, UL-AOA(UL-Angle of Arrival) 측정을 위해서 주기적, 비주기적, 반-영구적(semi-persistent) Rel. 15 SRS가 송신될 수 있으며, 이를 통해 UL TDOA 및 UL AOA가 지원될 수 있다.In Rel. 15 NR system, periodic, aperiodic, and semi-persistent Rel. 15 SRS can be transmitted for UL RTOA (UL-Relative Time of Arrival), UL SRS-RSRP, and UL-AOA (UL-Angle of Arrival) measurements of base stations, thereby supporting UL TDOA and UL AOA.

Rel. 16/17 NR 시스템에서는 기지국의 UL RTOA, UL SRS-RSRP, UL-AOA 및 gNB Rx-Tx time difference 측정을 위해서 주기적, 비주기적, 반-영구적(semi-persistent) SRS for positioning가 송신될 수 있으며, 이를 통해 UL TDOA, UL AOA 및 multi-RTT 가 지원될 수 있다.In Rel. 16/17 NR systems, periodic, aperiodic and semi-persistent SRS for positioning can be transmitted for UL RTOA, UL SRS-RSRP, UL-AOA and gNB Rx-Tx time difference measurement of the base station, thereby supporting UL TDOA, UL AOA and multi-RTT.

SRS는 그 사용 목적에 따라 설정되는 RRC parameter가 달라지며, 그 중 하나로 SRS for positioning의 경우 SRS-PosResources와 SRS-PosResourceSet을 통해 그 설정이 지시되며, 그 외의 목적으로 사용되는 SRS (e.g., Rel.15 SRS)의 경우 SRS-Resources와 SRS-ResourceSet을 통해 그 설정이 지시된다. Depending on the purpose of use, SRS has different RRC parameters set. For example, in the case of SRS for positioning, its settings are indicated through SRS-PosResources and SRS-PosResourceSet, and for SRS used for other purposes (e.g., Rel.15 SRS), its settings are indicated through SRS-Resources and SRS-ResourceSet.

포지셔닝을 위한 SRS 와 그 외의 목적으로 사용되는 SRS 간의 혼동을 방지하기 위하여, 이하에서는 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS를 SRS-p로 지칭하고, 그 외의 목적(e.g. beam management 등)으로 사용되는 SRS를 SRS-m로 지칭하기로 한다. 이하의 본 명세서에서 새롭게 제안되는 방안들에서 반대의 설명이 없다면 SRS는 SRS-p를 의미로 해석될 수 있다.In order to avoid confusion between SRS for positioning and SRS used for other purposes, hereinafter, SRS for positioning is referred to as SRS-p, and SRS used for other purposes (e.g. beam management, etc.) is referred to as SRS-m. In the newly proposed schemes in this specification below, unless otherwise stated, SRS can be interpreted to mean SRS-p.

자원 격자(Resource grid)(e.g., 도 3) 상에서 시간/주파수 도메인(time/frequency domain) 상 SRS 자원 맵핑 방법은 표준 문서에 정의되어 있는데, SRS-m의 경우 슬롯(slot) 내에서 반복이 설정될 수 있으며, 이를 이용한 슬롯-내 주파수 호핑(intra-slot frequency hopping)이 지원된다. 하지만, SRS-p의 경우 현재 NR 표준(Rel-17)을 기준으로 슬롯 내 반복이 설정될 수 없으며, 슬롯-내 주파수 호핑(intra-slot frequency hopping) 또한 지원되지 않는다. Periodic/semi-persistent SRS-m의 경우 주기적인 형태로 슬롯-간 주파수 호핑(inter-slot frequency hopping)이 지원된다. The method of mapping SRS resources in the time/frequency domain on a resource grid (e.g., Fig. 3) is defined in a standard document. In the case of SRS-m, repetition can be set within a slot, and intra-slot frequency hopping is supported using this. However, in the case of SRS-p, intra-slot repetition cannot be set based on the current NR standard (Rel-17), and intra-slot frequency hopping is also not supported. In the case of Periodic/semi-persistent SRS-m, inter-slot frequency hopping is supported in a periodic form.

단말의 서빙 셀 (또는 camp on cell)을 기준으로 SRS-p 설정이 제공되고, 단말이 SRS-p 설정에 기반하여 송신하는 SRS-p는 해당 서빙 셀을 포함하여 하나 또는 복수의 cell (또는 TRP)들이 수신할 수 있다.An SRS-p setting is provided based on the serving cell (or camp on cell) of the terminal, and the SRS-p transmitted by the terminal based on the SRS-p setting can be received by one or more cells (or TRPs) including the serving cell.

일례로 SRS-p는 TS 38.331 표준에 정의되어 있는 RRC parameter인 SRS-PosResourceSet 및 SRS-PosResource에 의하여 설정될 수 있다. 구체적으로, SRS에 대해 상위 계층 파라미터 SRS-PosResource가 설정되고(i.e., SRS-p), 상위 계층 파라미터 SpatialRelationInfoPos가 설정되면 레퍼런스 참조 신호의 구성 필드의 ID가 제공된다. 레퍼런스 RS는 상위 계층 파라미터 SRS-Resource 또는 SRS-PosResource에 의해 설정된 SRS, CSI-RS, SS/PBCH 블록, 서빙 셀의 DL PRS, 또는 SS/PBCH 블록에 구성된 DL PRS 일 수 있다. For example, SRS-p can be configured by RRC parameters SRS-PosResourceSet and SRS-PosResource defined in the TS 38.331 standard. Specifically, when the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource is configured for SRS (i.e., SRS-p) and the upper layer parameter SpatialRelationInfoPos is configured, an ID of a configuration field of a reference RS is provided. The reference RS can be an SRS configured by the upper layer parameter SRS-Resource or SRS-PosResource, a CSI-RS, an SS/PBCH block, a DL PRS of a serving cell, or a DL PRS configured in an SS/PBCH block.

UE는 동일한 OFDM 심볼에서 서로 다른 spatial 관계를 갖는 여러 SRS 자원을 전송할 것으로 기대되지 않는다.A UE is not expected to transmit multiple SRS resources with different spatial relationships in the same OFDM symbol.

상위 계층 파라미터 SpatialRelationInfoPos가 설정되지 않은 경우, 단말은 여러 SRS 자원에 걸쳐 상위 계층 파라미터 SRS-PosResource에 의해 설정된 SRS-p의 전송을 위해 고정된 공간 도메인 전송 필터를 사용하거나 다른 공간 도메인 전송 필터를 사용할 수 있다. If the upper layer parameter SpatialRelationInfoPos is not set, the terminal may use a fixed spatial domain transmission filter or use another spatial domain transmission filter for transmission of SRS-p set by the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource across multiple SRS resources.

RRC_CONNECTED 모드에서 단말은 활성 UL BWP 내에서 상위 계층 매개변수 SRS-PosResource에 의해 설정된 SRS-p를 전송한다.In RRC_CONNECTED mode, the UE transmits SRS-p configured by the upper layer parameter SRS-PosResource within the active UL BWP.

SRS-p 자원 별로 제공되는 상위 계층 파라미터 SpatialRelationInfoPos에 대해 하나의 RS 소스만 제공된다.Only one RS source is provided for the upper layer parameter SpatialRelationInfoPos per SRS-p resource.

동일한 캐리어에서의 동작의 경우, SRS-p가 스케줄링된 PUSCH와 충돌하는 경우 충돌이 발생한 심볼에서 SRS-p가 드롭된다.For operation on the same carrier, if SRS-p collides with a scheduled PUSCH, SRS-p is dropped in the symbol where the collision occurred.

단말은 PUSCH/PUCCH 전송을 위해 설정되지 않는 DL/UL 심볼로 구성된 슬롯 포맷을 갖는 서빙 셀의 캐리어에 SRS-PosResource가 설정될 것을 기대하지 않는다.The terminal does not expect SRS-PosResource to be set on a carrier of a serving cell having a slot format consisting of DL/UL symbols that are not set for PUSCH/PUCCH transmission.

UE 능력에 따라 초기 UL BWP와 관련된 SRS-p 자원이 설정될 수 있으며, SRS-p 자원은 초기 UL BWP에 대해 설정된 것과 동일한 CP 및 부반송파 간격으로 RRC_INACTIVE 모드 동안 초기 UL BWP 내에서 전송된다. UE 능력에 따라, RRC_INACTIVE 모드에서 초기 BWP 밖에 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS-p 자원이 설정될 수 있으며, SRS-p 전송을 위한 주파수 위치 및 대역폭, 서브캐리어 간격 및 CP 길이가 설정될 수 있다. RRC_INACTIVE 모드에서 초기 BWP 바깥에 설정되는 SRS-p 자원은 초기 UL BWP와 동일한 대역 및 CC에 설정된다.Depending on the UE capability, SRS-p resources related to the initial UL BWP can be configured, and the SRS-p resources are transmitted within the initial UL BWP during RRC_INACTIVE mode with the same CP and subcarrier spacing as those configured for the initial UL BWP. Depending on the UE capability, SRS-p resources for positioning can be configured outside the initial BWP in RRC_INACTIVE mode, and the frequency location and bandwidth, subcarrier spacing, and CP length for SRS-p transmission can be configured. SRS-p resources configured outside the initial BWP in RRC_INACTIVE mode are configured in the same band and CC as the initial UL BWP.

ISAC (Integrated Sensing And Communication)ISAC (Integrated Sensing And Communication)

최근 무선 통신 시스템에서는 wireless sensing을 활용하기 위한 방법들이 다양하게 논의되고 있다. 일반적으로 wireless sensing의 목적으로 기존의 radar 기술을 활용하는 방법이 고려될 수 있으나, radar 기술은 sensing에 특화되어 communication의 특성이 고려되어 있지 않다는 점과 송수신 노드가 wireless sensing 목적의 signal을 송수신 하기 위한 별도의 장치를 필요로 한다는 측면에서 제약이 발생될 수 있다. 이러한 문제점들을 해결하기 위하여 5G 그리고/또는 차세대 6G와 같이 cellular 망을 활용한 communication을 지원하는 무선 통신 시스템에서 wireless sensing을 활용하기 위한 방법들이 (e.g. ISAC 또는 JCAS (Joint Communication And Sensing)) 최근 활발하게 연구되고 있다. Recently, various methods for utilizing wireless sensing have been discussed in wireless communication systems. Generally, a method of utilizing existing radar technology for the purpose of wireless sensing can be considered, but radar technology is specialized for sensing and does not consider the characteristics of communication, and there may be limitations in that the transmitting and receiving nodes require separate devices to transmit and receive signals for the purpose of wireless sensing. To solve these problems, methods for utilizing wireless sensing in wireless communication systems that support communication using cellular networks, such as 5G and/or the next-generation 6G (e.g. ISAC or JCAS (Joint Communication And Sensing)) have been actively studied recently.

3GPP 표준화에서는 5G/6G 에서의 ISAC의 지원을 위한 study가 시작되었다. 3GPP SA1 WG에서 발간한 TR 22.837 문서상 wireless sensing은 환경의 특성 그리고/또는 주변 물체에 대한 정보를 취득하기 위한 기술로 거리, 각도 또는 순간 속도를 측정하기 위하여 radio wave를 사용하는 기술로 정의가 되어 있다. 이 때 sensing과 communication이 같은 frequency band와 hardware를 공유하는 시나리오가 고려되고 있으며, sensing을 위한 radio wave는 communication 목적의 radio wave를 공유/재사용 하거나 (e.g. communication 목적의 reference signal (e.g. SSB, DMRS, CSI-RS and/or SRS)의 사용) 또는 wireless sensing 목적의 radio wave를 별도로 설계하는 방법 또한 고려될 수 있다. In 3GPP standardization, a study has begun to support ISAC in 5G/6G. In TR 22.837 document published by 3GPP SA1 WG, wireless sensing is defined as a technology that uses radio waves to measure distance, angle, or instantaneous velocity to obtain information about the characteristics of the environment and/or surrounding objects. At this time, a scenario in which sensing and communication share the same frequency band and hardware is being considered, and the radio wave for sensing may share/reuse the radio wave for communication purposes (e.g. use of reference signal for communication purposes (e.g. SSB, DMRS, CSI-RS and/or SRS)) or design a separate radio wave for wireless sensing purposes.

일반적으로 ISAC에서 지원되는 wireless sensing은 송신단에서 송신한 signal이 target object에 반사되어 수신단에 수신되는 과정을 통해 수행됨을 고려할 수 있으며, 송신단과 수신단의 관계에 따라 구분되는 시나리오의 sensing mode가 정의될 수 있다. 송신단과 수신단의 일치 여부를 기준으로, 송신단과 수신단이 동일한 경우를 mono-static sensing mode, 그리고 송신단과 수신단이 상이한 경우를 bi-static sensing mode로 정의할 수 있다. In general, wireless sensing supported by ISAC can be considered to be performed through a process in which a signal transmitted from a transmitter is reflected by a target object and received by a receiver, and a sensing mode of a scenario that is distinguished depending on the relationship between the transmitter and the receiver can be defined. Based on whether the transmitter and the receiver are identical, a case in which the transmitter and the receiver are the same can be defined as a mono-static sensing mode, and a case in which the transmitter and the receiver are different can be defined as a bi-static sensing mode.

도 12는 ISAC에서 지원되는 wireless sensing 모드에 대한 예시들을 도시한다.Figure 12 illustrates examples of wireless sensing modes supported by ISAC.

도 12를 참조하면, 3GPP 표준에서의 송수신 동작과 이에 참여하는 노드들을 고려할 경우 sensing mode는 크게 다음과 같이 구분될 수 있다. Referring to Figure 12, when considering the transmission and reception operations and the nodes participating in them in the 3GPP standard, the sensing mode can be broadly classified as follows.

(a) BS mono-static sensing mode: radio wave를 송신한 BS 가 반사된 signal을 수신(a) BS mono-static sensing mode: BS that transmits radio waves receives the reflected signal.

(b) BS -to- BS bi-static sensing mode: 특정 BS 가 송신한 radio wave의 반사된 signal을 다른 BS 가 수신 (b) BS -to- BS bi-static sensing mode: A reflected signal of a radio wave transmitted by a specific BS is received by another BS.

(c) BS -to-UE bi-static sensing mode: BS 가 송신한 radio wave가 반사된 signal을 UE가 수신(c) BS-to-UE bi-static sensing mode: UE receives the signal that is the reflection of the radio wave transmitted by BS.

(d) BS mono-static sensing mode: radio wave를 송신한 UE가 반사된 signal을 수신(d) BS mono-static sensing mode: UE that transmits radio wave receives reflected signal

(e) UE-to-UE bi-static sensing mode: 특정 송신 UE가 송신한 radio wave의 반사된 signal을 다른 UE가 수신 (e) UE-to-UE bi-static sensing mode: A signal reflected from a radio wave transmitted by a specific transmitting UE is received by another UE.

(f) UE-to- BS bi-static sensing mode: 송신 UE가 송신한 radio wave의 반사된 signal을 BS 가 수신(f) UE-to-BS bi-static sensing mode: BS receives the reflected signal of the radio wave transmitted by the transmitting UE.

다만 위에서 언급된 6개의 use case 이외에도 복수의 송신/수신 노드가 포함된 sensing mode를 multi-static sensing mode의 용어를 사용하여 지칭할 수 있다. However, in addition to the six use cases mentioned above, a sensing mode that includes multiple transmitting/receiving nodes can be referred to using the term multi-static sensing mode.

ISAC/JCAS를 통한 wireless sensing은 다양한 시나리오에서의 적용이 고려되고 있다. 일반적으로 wireless sensing은 communication module이 없는 (또는 communication module과 무관하게) 대상에 대한 정보를 취득하기 위한 목적이 고려되며, 일례로 고려될 수 있는 시나리오는 크게 3가지 시나리오로 구분될 수 있다. Wireless sensing through ISAC/JCAS is being considered for application in various scenarios. In general, wireless sensing is considered for the purpose of obtaining information about a target without a communication module (or regardless of the communication module), and the scenarios that can be considered as examples can be largely divided into three scenarios.

(1) Object detection and tracking: 대상 물체나 사람을 sensing하거나 위치 정보를 추적하기 위한 시나리오로, Indoor/outdoor 상황에서의 침입자 sensing, UAV 또는 AGV의 위치 추적, 자율주행 지원의 시나리오 등이 대표적으로 고려될 수 있다. (1) Object detection and tracking: A scenario for sensing target objects or people or tracking location information. Representative scenarios that can be considered include intruder detection in indoor/outdoor situations, location tracking of UAVs or AGVs, and autonomous driving support.

(2) Environment monitoring: 송신/수신 노드 주변 환경에 대한 정보를 수집하기 위한 목적의 시나리오로, 강우 정보 관측, 홍수 sensing 시나리오 등이 대표적으로 고려될 수 있다. (2) Environment monitoring: A scenario for the purpose of collecting information about the environment around the transmitting/receiving node. Representative examples include rainfall information observation and flood sensing scenarios.

(3) Motion monitoring: 대상의 동작을 sensing하기 위한 시나리오로, 사람의 동작 또는 제스처를 구분하기 위한 시나리오 등이 대표적으로 고려될 수 있다. (3) Motion monitoring: A scenario for sensing the target’s motion, and representative examples include scenarios for distinguishing human motion or gestures.

상기의 각 시나리오에 요구되는 성능 척도와 그 수준은 다양하며 서로 상이할 수 있다. 각 시나리오에서 필요로 하는 서비스 품질에 적합한 ISAC/JCAS를 설계하기 위해서는 다양한 key performance requirement들이 고려될 필요가 있다. 3GPP 표준의 TS 22.137 문서에서는 각 서비스 시나리오에서 요구되는 성능에 대한 key performance requirement로 포지셔닝 추정의 정확도, 속도 추정의 정확도, 신뢰도(confidence level), 센싱 해상도(sensing resolution), 검출 실패 확률(missed detection probability), false alarm probability, 센싱 서비스 최대 지연, refreshing rate를 정의하였으며, 각 key performance requirement에 요구되는 수준은 서비스 시나리오 별로 달라질 수 있다. The performance measures and levels required for each of the above scenarios vary and may differ from each other. In order to design an ISAC/JCAS suitable for the service quality required for each scenario, various key performance requirements need to be considered. TS 22.137 of the 3GPP standard defines the key performance requirements for the performance required for each service scenario as positioning estimation accuracy, velocity estimation accuracy, confidence level, sensing resolution, missed detection probability, false alarm probability, sensing service maximum delay, and refreshing rate. The level required for each key performance requirement may vary for each service scenario.

무선 주파수 센싱 기능은 네트워크 내 장치를 통해 물체에 연결할 필요가 없기 때문에 장치 없이 물체 위치 파악을 위한 서비스를 제공할 수 있다. 무선 주파수 신호로부터 범위, 속도 및 각도 정보를 얻는 기능은 다양한 물체 sensing, 물체 인식(예, 차량, 인간, 동물, UAV) 및 고정밀 위치 파악, 추적, 및 활동 인식과 같은 광범위한 새로운 기능을 제공할 수 있다. 무선 센싱 서비스는, 예를 들어, 침입자 sensing, 보조 자동차 조종 및 내비게이션, 궤적 추적, 충돌 회피, 교통 관리, 건강 및 교통 관리 등을 제공하는 애플리케이션을 가능하게 하는 다양한 업종(예, 무인 항공기, 스마트 홈, V2X, 공장, 철도, 공공 안전 등)에 정보를 제공할 수 있다. 경우에 따라, 무선 센싱은 3GPP 기반 센싱을 추가로 지원하기 위해 비-3GPP 유형 센서(예, 레이더, 카메라)를 사용할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 센싱 서비스의 동작, 즉 센싱 동작은 무선 센싱 신호의 전송, 반사, 산란 처리에 의존할 수 있다. 따라서, 무선 센싱은 기존 통신 시스템을 통신 네트워크에서 무선 통신 및 센싱 네트워크로 강화할 수 있는 기회를 제공할 수 있다. Radio frequency sensing capability can provide a service for object localization without a device, because it does not require a device to be connected to the object through a network. The ability to obtain range, velocity and angle information from radio frequency signals can provide a wide range of new functions, such as various object sensing, object recognition (e.g., vehicles, humans, animals, UAVs), and high-precision localization, tracking, and activity recognition. Wireless sensing services can provide information to a variety of industries (e.g., unmanned aerial vehicles, smart homes, V2X, factories, railways, public safety, etc.), enabling applications such as intruder sensing, assisted vehicle steering and navigation, trajectory tracking, collision avoidance, traffic management, health and traffic management, etc. In some cases, wireless sensing can use non-3GPP type sensors (e.g., radar, camera) to additionally support 3GPP-based sensing. For example, the operation of the wireless sensing service, i.e., the sensing operation, can rely on the transmission, reflection and scattering processing of wireless sensing signals. Therefore, wireless sensing can provide an opportunity to enhance existing communication systems from communication networks to wireless communication and sensing networks.

도 13 및 도 14는 3GPP 무선 통신 시스템에 ISAC이 적용되는 일 예를 나타낸다. 도 13 및 도 14의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다. 구체적으로, 도 13은 동일 위치에 있는 센싱 수신기와 센싱 송신기를 사용한 센싱(예, monostatic sensing)의 예를 나타내고, 도 14는 분리된 센싱 수신기와 센싱 송신기를 사용한 센싱(예, bistatic sensing)의 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 illustrate an example of applying ISAC to a 3GPP wireless communication system. The embodiments of FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. Specifically, FIG. 13 illustrates an example of sensing using a sensing receiver and a sensing transmitter located at the same location (e.g., monostatic sensing), and FIG. 14 illustrates an example of sensing using a separated sensing receiver and a sensing transmitter (e.g., bistatic sensing).

이하에서 살펴볼 제안들은 상술한 ISAC 환경에도 적용될 수 있다.The suggestions discussed below can also be applied to the ISAC environment described above.

Timing Adjustment and SRS for positioning with frequency hoppingTiming Adjustment and SRS for positioning with frequency hopping

RedCap 단말의 경우, 기존 NR을 지원하는 단말을 일반 단말 (normal UE)에 비해 지원하는 최대 주파수 대역폭이 작아 송수신되는 reference signal의 decoding/detection 정확도 측면에서 성능 저하가 있을 수 있다. 이에 따라, RedCap 단말의 측위 정확도 향상을 위해 주파수 호핑 방식이 핵심 해결 방안으로 고려되어 논의되고 있다. In the case of RedCap terminals, the maximum frequency bandwidth supported by terminals supporting existing NR is smaller than that of normal UEs, so there may be a performance degradation in terms of the accuracy of decoding/detection of reference signals transmitted and received. Accordingly, frequency hopping is being considered and discussed as a key solution to improve the positioning accuracy of RedCap terminals.

상기 주파수 호핑 방식은 RedCap 단말이 주파수 대역폭을 호핑하면서 송신하기 때문에, 현재 NR Rel-18 표준에서 지원하는 BWP의 설정과 별개로 설정될 수 있다. 또한, 주파수 호핑 방식을 통한 SRS-pos resource의 송신을 보장하기 위한 상향 링크 시간 구간 (UL time window, 이하 UTW)의 설정 또한 BWP 그리고/혹은 주파수 호핑이 설정된 SRS-pos resource (이하 SRS-pos-FH)의 설정과 별개로 설정될 수 있다. 따라서, Timing advance (이하 TA) 동작을 지시 받고 TA 동작을 적용하도록 지시받은 구간 내에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW가 설정된 경우, TA 적용 대상 slot counting 그리고/혹은 TA command value 를 결정하기 위해 SRS-pos-FH / UTW의 SCS가 고려되어야 할 수 있다. 이러한 특징 및 문제점들을 고려하여, TA 동작 방식 시 SCS 결정 방법을 제안한다.The above frequency hopping scheme can be set separately from the BWP setting supported by the current NR Rel-18 standard because the RedCap terminal transmits while hopping the frequency bandwidth. In addition, the setting of the uplink time window (hereinafter referred to as UTW) to ensure the transmission of the SRS-pos resource through the frequency hopping scheme can also be set separately from the setting of the BWP and/or the SRS-pos resource (hereinafter referred to as SRS-pos-FH) to which the frequency hopping is set. Therefore, when the Timing advance (hereinafter referred to as TA) operation is instructed and the SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set within the section instructed to apply the TA operation, the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH / UTW may need to be considered to determine the slot counting and/or the TA command value to which the TA is applied. Considering these features and problems, we propose a method for determining the SCS in the TA operation scheme.

상기 SRS-pos-FH가 설정된 단말이 Serving cell의 기지국으로부터 SRS-pos-FH의 전송이 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시되는 경우, SRS-pos-FH resource의 일부 홉(들)의 UL 송신 timing이 조정될 수 있지만, neighboring cell의 기지국들은 TA command 정보를 공유 받지 못하므로 해당 단말이 전송한 UL SRS-pos-FH resource를 수신하여 측정할 때 정확도 측면에서 성능 저하가 있을 수 있다. When a terminal for which the above SRS-pos-FH is set is instructed by the base station of the serving cell to apply TA to a slot for which SRS-pos-FH transmission is set, the UL transmission timing of some hop(s) of the SRS-pos-FH resource may be adjusted, but since base stations of neighboring cells do not share TA command information, there may be a degradation in performance in terms of accuracy when receiving and measuring the UL SRS-pos-FH resource transmitted by the terminal.

상기 주파수 호핑 방식이 RedCap 단말의 SRS-pos resource 전송에 사용되면, 최대 주파수 대역폭이 작은 RedCap 단말은 호핑 시마다 RF retuning 동작이 요구된다. 이를 위해 단말의 capability에 따라 인접한 홉 간 요구 시간 간격 (required switching gap between consecutive hops)이 설정될 수 있으며, 이를 보장받지 못하는 경우 SRS-pos-FH의 일부 symbol(s)이 drop될 수 있다. 따라서, SRS-pos-resource의 전송이 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시되는 경우, 일부 symbol(s)의 drop이 야기될 수 있다. When the above frequency hopping method is used for SRS-pos resource transmission of a RedCap terminal, a RedCap terminal with a small maximum frequency bandwidth is required to perform RF retuning operation at each hopping. For this, a required switching gap between consecutive hops may be set according to the capability of the terminal, and if this is not guaranteed, some symbol(s) of SRS-pos-FH may be dropped. Accordingly, if TA is instructed to be applied to a slot where transmission of SRS-pos-resource is set, drop of some symbol(s) may occur.

이러한 특징 및 문제점들을 고려하여, 본 개시에서는 RedCap UE의 UL SRS 기반 측위 기법의 정확도 성능 유지를 위해 SRS-pos-FH resource가 설정된 시간 자원에서의 TA 동작 방식을 제안한다.Considering these features and problems, the present disclosure proposes a TA operation method in a time resource where SRS-pos-FH resource is set to maintain the accuracy performance of a UL SRS-based positioning technique of a RedCap UE.

이하에서 TA command는 3GPP 표준 TS 38.213과 TS 38.321에 기술된 바와 같이, random access response나 absolute TA command MAC CE를 통해 지시되는 값에 의하여 결정되는 absolute TA 지시 동작이거나 또는 timing adjustment를 지시하는 MAC CE를 수신한 경우에 관련될 수 있다. Hereinafter, a TA command may be an absolute TA indication operation determined by a value indicated via a random access response or an absolute TA command MAC CE as described in 3GPP standards TS 38.213 and TS 38.321, or may be relevant when a MAC CE indicating timing adjustment is received.

본 개시에서는 상향 링크 SRS-pos 주파수 호핑 전송 그리고/혹은 UL time window (UTW)가 설정된 구간에서의 Timing Advance (TA) 설정/동작하는 방식을 제안한다. The present disclosure proposes a method for setting/operating Timing Advance (TA) in an uplink SRS-pos frequency hopping transmission and/or a period in which a UL time window (UTW) is set.

이하에서의 제안들은 각각이 개별적으로 실시되거나 조합되어 실시될 수 있다. The suggestions below can be implemented individually or in combination.

[제안 1] TA 동작에 대한 SCS 결정[Proposal 1] SCS Determination for TA Operation

[제안 1-1] TA가 적용될 slot을 결정하는데 사용될 SCS의 결정[Proposal 1-1] Determination of SCS to be used in determining the slot to which TA will be applied

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 후 TA를 적용할 slot를 결정하는 방식을 제안한다.We propose a method for determining a slot to apply TA after a terminal receives a TA command from a base station.

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH resource 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정될 수 있다. 이와 같은 상황에서 SCS를 고려하여 TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하는 방식이 제안된다. Part or all of the SRS-pos-FH resources and/or UTWs may be set between the slot in which the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which the TA is to be applied. In this situation, a method of determining the slot to which the TA is to be applied by considering the SCS is proposed.

구체적인 일례로, 도 15를 참조하면 단말이 n 번째 UL slot에서 TA command를 수신하였으며, 기존 방식에 따를 때 TA command를 통해 지시된 TA는 n+k+1 번째 UL slot에서 적용된다고 가정한다. UL BWP의 SCS 및 슬롯을 기준으로, n+k 번째 UL slot부터 4 slots에 걸쳐 SRS-pos-FH resource가 설정된다. SRS-pos-FH resource가 설정된 슬롯들 중 일부는 TA command가 수신된 슬롯 n 내지 TA 가 적용되어야 하는 슬롯 n+k+1 구간 내에 위치한다.As a specific example, referring to FIG. 15, it is assumed that the terminal receives a TA command in the nth UL slot, and the TA indicated by the TA command according to the existing method is applied in the n+k+1th UL slot. Based on the SCS and slots of the UL BWP, SRS-pos-FH resources are set for 4 slots starting from the n+kth UL slot. Some of the slots for which SRS-pos-FH resources are set are located within the interval from slot n where the TA command is received to slot n+k+1 where TA should be applied.

이와 같이 SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW의 적어도 일부가 슬롯 n: 슬롯 n+k+1 구간 내에 위치하는 경우, 혹은 SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW의 적어도 일부가 슬롯 n+k+1과 중첩하는 경우에서 SCS를 고려하여 TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하는 방식이 제안된다. In this way, a method is proposed to determine a slot to which TA is applied by considering SCS when at least a part of SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW is located within the interval slot n: slot n+k+1, or when at least a part of SRS-pos-FH resource/UTW overlaps slot n+k+1.

(1) Option 1. 설정된 SRS-pos-FH의 SCS를 따르는 방식(1) Option 1. Method of following the SCS of the set SRS-pos-FH

SRS-pos-FH이 설정되거나 capable한 단말의 경우, 설정된 SRS-pos-FH의 SCS에 따라 TA command에따른 TA가 적용되는 slot이 결정되도록 정할 수 있다. For terminals that are capable of SRS-pos-FH or configured, the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the configured SRS-pos-FH.

일 예로 도 15와 같은 상황에서 TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하기 위하여 SRS-pos-FH의 SCS을 고려할 수 있다. For example, in a situation such as Fig. 15, the SCS of SRS-pos-FH can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is applied.

(i) 구체적인 일 예로, 단말은 UL slot n+k부터는 SRS-pos-FH resource의 SCS에 기반하여 slot을 counting할 수 있다. (ii) 또 다른 구체적인 일례로, 단말은 UL slot n 부터 SRS-pos-FH의 SCS를 기준으로 새로운 TA의 적용 slot 위치를 counting 하도록 정할 수 있다. 상기 제안 방식은 SRS-pos-FH resource의 다른 신호/채널과의 collision에 따른 drop 여부와는 무관하게 적용될 수 있다. (i) As a specific example, the terminal can count slots based on the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH resource from UL slot n+k. (ii) As another specific example, the terminal can count the application slot positions of new TAs based on the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH from UL slot n. The proposed method can be applied regardless of whether or not there is a drop due to collision with other signals/channels of the SRS-pos-FH resource.

상기 option 1 제안 방식이 적용되는 경우, TA 적용 slot에 active UL BWP의 SCS보다 작은 SCS가 설정된 SRS-pos-FH의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정되어 있을 때, 또는 단말에 설정된 all configured UL BWP (and all configured DL BWP)를 기준으로 가장 작은 SCS보다 SRS-pos-FH의 SCS가 더 작은 경우, 지시되는 TA adjustment의 slot 위치가 SRS-pos-FH 전송을 기준으로 slot boundary에 align되어 TA 적용 시점의 ambiguity를 방지할 수 있다는 이점이 있다. In case the above option 1 proposal method is applied, when some or all of the SRS-pos-FHs are configured with an SCS smaller than the SCS of the active UL BWP in the TA application slot, or when the SCS of the SRS-pos-FH is smaller than the smallest SCS based on all configured UL BWPs (and all configured DL BWPs) set in the terminal, there is an advantage in that the slot position of the indicated TA adjustment is aligned to the slot boundary based on the SRS-pos-FH transmission, thereby preventing ambiguity at the time of TA application.

(2) Option 2. 설정된 UTW의 SCS를 따르는 방식(2) Option 2. Method of following the SCS of the set UTW

SRS-pos-FH을 위한 UTW가 설정되거나 capable한 단말의 경우, 설정된 UTW의 SCS에 따라 TA command에따른 TA가 적용되는 slot이 결정되도록 정할 수 있다. 일례로 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 UTW가 설정된 경우, TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하기 위해 설정된 UTW의 SCS을 고려할 수 있다. For a terminal for which a UTW is set or capable of SRS-pos-FH, the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the set UTW. For example, if a UTW is set in a slot section including a slot in which the terminal receives a TA command from the base station and a slot to which TA is to be applied, the SCS of the set UTW can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is to be applied.

구체적인 일례로, 도 15와 같은 상황에서, UL slot n+k 부터는 UTW의 SCS에 기반하여 slot을 counting할 수 있다. As a concrete example, in a situation like Fig. 15, slots can be counted based on the SCS of UTW starting from UL slot n+k.

또 다른 일례로, 단말이 n 번째 UL slot에서 TA command를 수신하고 n+8 번째 UL slot에서 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 경우, n 번째 UL slot부터 n+8번째 UL slot까지의 slot 구간 내인 n+4 번째 UL slot부터 2 slots에 걸쳐 UTW가 설정된 경우, n+4 UL slot부터 n+5 UL slot까지는 UTW의 SCS에 기반하여 slot을 counting하고, n+6 UL slot부터는 다시 active UL BWP의 SCS에 기반하여 slot을 counting 할 수 있다.As another example, if a terminal receives a TA command in the nth UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+8th UL slot, and UTW is configured for 2 slots starting from the n+4th UL slot within the slot range from the nth UL slot to the n+8th UL slot, slots can be counted based on the SCS of the UTW from the n+4th UL slot to the n+5th UL slot, and slots can be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP from the n+6th UL slot.

상기 option 2 제안 방식이 적용되는 경우, TA 적용 slot에 active UL BWP의 SCS보다 작은 SCS가 설정된 UTW가 설정되어 있을 때, 또는 단말에 설정된 all configured UL BWP (and all configured DL BWP)를 기준으로 가장 작은 SCS보다 UTW의 SCS가 더 작은 경우, 지시되는 TA adjustment의 slot 위치가 UTW를 기준으로 slot boundary에 align되어 TA 적용 시점의 ambiguity를 방지할 수 있다는 이점이 있다.In case the above option 2 proposal method is applied, when a UTW is set to have an SCS smaller than the SCS of the active UL BWP in the TA application slot, or when the SCS of the UTW is smaller than the smallest SCS based on all configured UL BWPs (and all configured DL BWPs) set in the terminal, there is an advantage in that the slot position of the indicated TA adjustment is aligned to the slot boundary based on the UTW, thereby preventing ambiguity at the time of TA application.

(3) Option 3. Active UL BWP의 SCS를 따르는 방식(3) Option 3. Method following SCS of Active UL BWP

SRS-pos-FH을 위한 UTW가 설정되거나 capable한 단말의 경우, 단말에 설정된 UL 또는 UL/DL BWP의 SCS에 따라 TA command에따른 TA가 적용되는 slot이 결정되도록 정할 수 있다. 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH resource 그리고/혹은 UTW의 설정 여부에 무관하게 TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하기 위해 active UL BWP의 SCS만을 고려할 수 있다. For a terminal capable of or having a UTW configured for SRS-pos-FH, the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the UL or UL/DL BWP configured in the terminal. Regardless of whether SRS-pos-FH resources and/or UTWs are configured, only the SCS of the active UL BWP can be considered to determine the slot to which TA is applied between the slot in which the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which TA is instructed to be applied.

구체적인 일례로, 단말이 n 번째 UL slot에서 TA command를 수신하고 n+k+1 번째 UL slot에서 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 경우, n 번째 UL slot부터 n+k+1번째 UL slot까지의 slot 구간 내에 SRS-pos-FH resource 전송 시작 설정 여부와 무관하게 active UL BWP의 SCS에 기반하여 slot을 counting할 수 있으며, n+k+1 번째 UL slot 이전에 BWP switching이 이뤄지는 경우 new active UL BWP의 SCS에 기반하여 UL slot을 counting 할 수 있다.As a concrete example, if a terminal receives a TA command in the n-th UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+k+1-th UL slot, slots can be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP regardless of whether SRS-pos-FH resource transmission start is set within the slot period from the n-th UL slot to the n+k+1-th UL slot, and if BWP switching occurs before the n+k+1-th UL slot, UL slots can be counted based on the SCS of the new active UL BWP.

Option 3의 제안 방법은 active UL BWP가 아닌 단말에게 configured된 all UL BWP (또는 All UL and DL BWP)를 기준으로 정해질 수 있다. 구체적인 방법으로 단말에게 configure된 all UL BWP(또는 All UL and DL BWP)를 대상으로 가장 작은 SCS를 기준 SCS로 정하고, 이를 바탕으로 slot의 위치를 결정하도록 정할 수 있다. The proposed method of Option 3 can be determined based on all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal, not the active UL BWP. Specifically, the smallest SCS among all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal can be set as the reference SCS, and the slot position can be determined based on this.

상기 option 3 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, 단말은 periodic SRS-pos-FH의 dropping 혹은 기지국으로부터 동적 지시되는 SP/AP SRS-pos-FH resource들을 고려하지 않고 TA의 적용 대상 slot을 계산할 수 있으므로 복잡도 감소라는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above option 3 proposal method is applied, the terminal can calculate the applicable slot of the TA without considering the dropping of periodic SRS-pos-FH or the SP/AP SRS-pos-FH resources dynamically indicated from the base station, so there may be an advantage of reducing complexity.

(4) Option 4. SRS-pos-FH / UTW의 SCS와 Active UL BWP의 SCS 중 작은 SCS를 따르는 방식(4) Option 4. Method of following the smaller SCS among SRS-pos-FH/UTW's SCS and Active UL BWP's SCS

SRS-pos-FH을 위한 UTW가 설정되거나 capable한 단말의 경우, 설정된 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/또는 UTW의 SCS와 설정된 UL 또는 UL/DL BWP의 SCS에 따라 TA command에 따른 TA가 적용되는 slot이 결정되도록 정할 수 있다. 일례로 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우, TA를 적용하는 slot을 결정하기 위해 설정된 SRS-pos-FH / UTW의 SCS와 Active UL BWP의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS를 따라 결정할 수 있다. For a terminal capable of having a UTW for SRS-pos-FH set or configured, the slot to which TA is applied according to the TA command can be determined based on the SCS of the set SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW and the SCS of the set UL or UL/DL BWP. For example, if some or all of the SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set in a slot section including a slot in which the terminal receives a TA command from the base station and a target slot to which TA is instructed to be applied, the slot to which TA is applied can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCS of the set SRS-pos-FH / UTW and the SCS of the Active UL BWP.

Option 4의 제안 방법에서 active UL BWP는 단말에게 configured된 all UL BWP (또는 All UL and DL BWP)로 대체되어 정해질 수 있다. 구체적인 방법으로 단말에게 configure된 all UL BWP(또는 All UL and DL BWP)를 대상으로 가장 작은 SCS를 기준 SCS로 정하고, 이를 바탕으로 slot의 위치를 결정하도록 정할 수 있다. In the proposed method of Option 4, the active UL BWP can be determined by replacing all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal. In a specific method, the smallest SCS among all UL BWPs (or All UL and DL BWPs) configured in the terminal can be determined as the reference SCS, and the slot position can be determined based on this.

상기 option 4 제안 방식이 적용되는 경우, TA 적용 slot에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정되어 있을 때, 가장 작은 SCS을 기준으로 단일한 TA 적용 slot의 위치를 결정하기 때문에 항상 slot boundary의 시작 위치에서 TA adjustment를 적용하도록 지원될 수 있으며, 실제 전송되는 signal/channel에 관계없이 단일한 slot 위치 결정 방식을 따를 수 있어 단말의 complexity 측면에서 유리한 효과를 제공한다. In case the above option 4 proposal method is applied, when some or all of SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set in a TA application slot, since the position of a single TA application slot is determined based on the smallest SCS, it can always be supported to apply TA adjustment from the start position of the slot boundary, and a single slot position determination method can be followed regardless of the signal/channel actually transmitted, providing an advantageous effect in terms of terminal complexity.

(5) Option 5. First UL transmission slot의 SCS를 따르는 방식(5) Option 5. Method following SCS of the first UL transmission slot

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우, TA를 적용하는 slot 위치를 결정하기 위해 지시된 TA를 수신한 slot의 다음 첫 UL 전송 slot의 SCS를 따를 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 n 번째 UL slot에서 TA command를 수신하고 n+k+1 번째 UL slot에서 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 경우, n+1 번째 UL slot의 active UL BWP의 SCS에 기반하여 n+k+1 번째 slot을 counting 하여 해당 slot에 TA를 적용할 수 있다.If a part or all of SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set in a slot section including a slot in which a terminal receives a TA command from a base station and a target slot to which the terminal is instructed to apply TA, the SCS of the first UL transmission slot following the slot in which the instructed TA is received may be followed to determine the slot position to apply the TA. As a specific example, if the terminal receives a TA command in the n-th UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+k+1-th UL slot, the n+k+1-th slot may be counted based on the SCS of the active UL BWP of the n+1-th UL slot and the TA may be applied to the corresponding slot.

상기 option 5 제안 방식이 적용되는 경우, 기지국이 TA를 지시하는 시점의 가장 근접한 active UL BWP의 SCS를 따를 수 있고, 다른 SRS-pos-FH / UTW / new active UL BWP 의 SCS를 고려하지 않을 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above option 5 proposal method is applied, there may be an advantage that the base station can follow the SCS of the closest active UL BWP at the time of indicating TA, and may not consider the SCS of other SRS-pos-FH/UTW/new active UL BWP.

상기 제안된 제안 1-1이 사용되는 구체적인 일례 중 하나로, 3GPP에서 SRS-pos-FH의 전송을 지원하기 위한 목적으로 사용될 수 있으며, 그 구체적인 방식은 TS 38.213 표준 문서에 기술되어 있는 TA adjustment 적용 slot의 결정 방법을 따르도록 정할 수 있다. 해당 실시예에서, 만약 단말이 UL slot n의 위치에서 TA command를 수신한 경우, 단말은 UL slot n+k+1+2μ*Koffset의 위치에서 TA adjustment를 수행하도록 정할 수 있으며, 이 때 Koffset의 값은 TS 38.213의 정의를 따를 수 있다. 또한 n과 k를 결정하는 기준은 제안 1-1의 방법 중 하나 또는 그 조합에 의하여 결정될 수 있다. 구체적으로 slot n은 특정 SCS을 기준으로 결정될 수 있으며 상기 특정 SCS는 본 개시의 제안 1-1에서 제안하는 option 중 하나 또는 option들의 조합에 의하여 결정될 수 있다. 또한 k가 결정되는 구체적인 방법은 제안하는 제안 1-1의 방법 중 하나 또는 그 조합에 의하여 결정될 수 있으며 이는 상기 slot n이 결정되는 방법과 동일하거나 또는 별개의 기준이 사용될 수 있다. 상기 k를 결정하는 보다 구체적인 방법으로 k=Ceiling [Nslot subframe, μ *(NT,1+NT,2+NTA,max+0.5)/Tsf]의 수식을 통해 결정될 수 있으며, 해당 수식에 포함된 Nslot subframe,μ, NT,1, 그리고 NT,2는 각각 특정 SCS에 의하여 결정되도록 정할 수 있으며 상기 특정 SCS는 제안 1-1에서 option들 중 하나 또는 복수의 조합에 의하여 결정될 수 있다. 이 때 각 Nslot subframe,μ, NT,1, 그리고 NT,2의 결정을 위해 사용되는 특정 SCS의 선택 조건은 서로 같거나 또는 상이할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 상기 파라미터 n과 상기 파라미터 k를 계산하기 위해 사용되는 Nslot subframe,μ는 모든 configured UL BWP, configured SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS에 기반하여 결정할 수 있으며, 상기 파라미터 k를 계산하기 위해 사용되는 NT,1 및 NT,2 는 모든 configured UL BWP, configured DL BWP, configured SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS에 기반하여 결정할 수 있다. 또 다른 일례로, 상기 파라미터 n과 상기 파라미터 k를 계산하기 위해 사용되는 Nslot subframe,μ는 모든 configured UL BWP, configured SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS에 기반하여 결정할 수 있으며, 상기 파라미터 k를 계산하기 위해 사용되는 NT,1과 NT,2는 모든 configured UL BWP, configured DL BWP의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS에 기반하여 결정할 수 있다. As one specific example in which the proposed proposal 1-1 is used, it can be used for the purpose of supporting transmission of SRS-pos-FH in 3GPP, and the specific method thereof can be determined to follow the method for determining a TA adjustment application slot described in the TS 38.213 standard document. In the embodiment, if the terminal receives a TA command at the position of UL slot n, the terminal can determine to perform TA adjustment at the position of UL slot n+k+1+2 μ *K offset , and at this time, the value of K offset can follow the definition of TS 38.213. In addition, the criteria for determining n and k can be determined by one or a combination of the methods of the proposal 1-1. Specifically, slot n can be determined based on a specific SCS, and the specific SCS can be determined by one or a combination of the options suggested in the proposal 1-1 of the present disclosure. In addition, a specific method by which k is determined can be determined by one or a combination of the methods of the proposed Proposal 1-1, which may be the same as or use a separate criterion from the method by which the slot n is determined. A more specific method for determining the k may be determined by a formula of k = Ceiling [N slot subframe, μ * (N T,1 + N T,2 + N TA,max +0.5)/T sf ], and N slot subframe, μ , N T,1 , and N T,2 included in the formula may be determined by specific SCSs, and the specific SCSs may be determined by one or a combination of multiple options in the Proposal 1-1. In this case, selection conditions of specific SCSs used for determining each of the N slot subframe, μ , N T,1 , and N T,2 may be the same or different from each other. As a specific example, N slot subframe,μ used to calculate the parameters n and k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs, and N T,1 and N T,2 used to calculate the parameter k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured DL BWPs, and configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs. As another example, N slot subframe,μ used to calculate the parameters n and k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs, and N T,1 and N T,2 used to calculate the parameter k can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs.

[제안 1-1]의 option들은 일부 혹은 전부가 적용될 수 있으며, 각 option들의 우선순위로 동작이 결정될 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 slot과 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 UTW가 설정된 경우 option 2를 적용할 수 있으며, 그렇지 않은 경우 option 3을 적용할 수 있다.Some or all of the options in [Proposal 1-1] may be applied, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option. As a specific example, if UTW is set in the slot section between the slot where the terminal receives the TA command from the base station and the slot to which TA is to be applied, option 2 may be applied, and if not, option 3 may be applied.

[제안 1-2] TA value 계산 시 SCS 결정 방법[Proposal 1-2] How to determine SCS when calculating TA value

본 개시에서는 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA command를 수신한 후 TA를 적용하는 value를 결정하는 방식을 제안한다.In this disclosure, we propose a method for determining a value to apply TA after a terminal receives a TA command from a base station.

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot에 SRS-pos-FH resource 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우, TA를 적용하는 value를 결정하는 방식이 제안될 수 있다. A method for determining a value to apply TA when a part or all of SRS-pos-FH resource and/or UTW is set to an application target slot instructed to apply TA by a terminal from a base station can be proposed.

(1) Option 1. [제안 1-1]의 SCS 결정 방법을 따르는 방식(1) Option 1. A method that follows the SCS determination method of [Proposal 1-1]

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우, [제안 1-1]에서 TA 적용 대상 slot counting 시 SCS를 결정하기 위해 사용된 SCS 중 일부를 TA를 적용하는 value를 결정하는 방식이 제안될 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 기지국으로부터 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우 [제안 1-1]에 의해 n과 Nslot subframe,μ를 결정하기 위해 고려된 모든 configured UL BWP, configured SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW의 SCS 중 가장 작은 SCS를 기반으로 TA를 적용하는 value를 결정할 수 있다. In a case where a part or all of SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW is set to an applicable slot to which a terminal is instructed to apply TA from a base station, a method may be proposed in which some of the SCSs used to determine the SCS when counting the TA target slots in [Proposal 1-1] are used to determine the value for applying TA. As a specific example, in a case where a part or all of SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW is set to an applicable slot to which a terminal is instructed to apply TA from a base station , the value for applying TA can be determined based on the smallest SCS among the SCSs of all configured UL BWPs, configured SRS-pos-FH resources / UTWs considered for determining n and N slot subframes,μ by [Proposal 1-1].

상기 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, TA를 적용할 slot을 counting한 SCS를 그대로 따르기 때문에 해당 slot의 절대적인 시간 길이에 맞추어 TA value를 적용할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다.If the above proposed method is applied, there may be an advantage in that the TA value can be applied according to the absolute time length of the corresponding slot because it follows the SCS that counts the slots to which TA is applied.

(2) Option 2. SRS-pos-FH / UTW 와 Active UL BWP 중 큰 SCS를 따르는 방식(2) Option 2. Method that follows the larger SCS among SRS-pos-FH/UTW and Active UL BWP

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot에 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW의 일부 혹은 전부가 설정된 경우, TA를 적용하는 value를 정하기 위해 설정된 SRS-pos-FH / UTW와 Active UL BWP 중 큰 SCS를 고려할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 n 번째 UL slot에서 TA command를 수신하고 n+k+1 번째 UL slot에서 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 경우, n+k+1번째 slot에 active UL BWP의 SCS는 30kHz이고 SRS-pos-FH는 15kHz의 SCS로 설정된 경우, TA value의 SCS는 30kHz로 결정할 수 있다. If a UE is instructed to apply TA from a base station and some or all of SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set for an applicable slot, a larger SCS among the set SRS-pos-FH / UTW and Active UL BWP may be considered to determine a value to apply TA. As a specific example, if a UE receives a TA command in the n-th UL slot and is instructed to apply TA in the n+k+1-th UL slot, and if the SCS of the active UL BWP in the n+k+1-th slot is 30 kHz and SRS-pos-FH is set to an SCS of 15 kHz, the SCS of the TA value can be determined as 30 kHz.

상기 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, 가장 큰 SCS를 따르면 적용 TA 값의 절대적 시간 단위가 짧아지므로 TA를 보다 세밀하게 조정할 수 있고 이에 따라 전송 설정된 SRS-pos-FH resource의 measurement에 대한 정확도가 높아져 측위 정확도 성능 측면에서 이점이 있을 수 있다.When the above proposed method is applied, the absolute time unit of the applied TA value becomes shorter when following the largest SCS, so that the TA can be adjusted more finely, and accordingly, the accuracy of the measurement of the SRS-pos-FH resource set for transmission is increased, which may have an advantage in terms of positioning accuracy performance.

(3) Option 3. Active UL BWP의 SCS를 따르는 방식(3) Option 3. Method following SCS of Active UL BWP

단말이 기지국으로부터 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 적용 대상 slot에 TA를 적용하는 value를 정하기 위해 Active UL BWP의 SCS를 고려할 수 있다. Active UL BWP는 TA 적용이 지시된 slot 다음 UL slot을 기준으로 할 수 있으며, TA를 적용하는 slot 이전에 BWP switching이 발생한 경우 새로운 active UL BWP를 기준으로 할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 기지국으로부터 단말에 지시되거나 [제안 2-1]에 의해 지정된 TA 적용 대상 slot에서 TA 적용 value를 정하기 위해 해당 slot의 active UL BWP의 SCS를 따를 수 있다.The SCS of the Active UL BWP can be considered to determine the value of applying TA to the target slot instructed to apply TA by the base station. The Active UL BWP can be based on the UL slot following the slot instructed to apply TA, and if BWP switching occurs before the slot to apply TA, it can be based on the new active UL BWP. As a specific example, the SCS of the active UL BWP of the slot can be followed to determine the value of applying TA in the TA target slot instructed by the base station to the terminal or designated by [Proposal 2-1].

(i) Option 3-1. 단말이 TA를 적용하는 slot에 SRS-pos-FH가 전송될 경우 동작 방식(i) Option 3-1. Operation method when SRS-pos-FH is transmitted in a slot where the terminal applies TA

만약 단말이 TA를 적용하는 slot에 SRS-pos-FH가 전송될 경우, SRS-pos-FH의 SCS를 따를 수 있으며, 해당 slot 내에 data와 SRS-pos-FH가 모두 전송될 경우, 가장 먼저 전송되는 신호/채널의 SCS를 따를 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 TA를 적용하는 slot에서 data전송과 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 차례로 동작하도록 설정되어 있다면, TA 적용 value를 정하기 위해 active UL BWP의 SCS를 따를 수 있다. If SRS-pos-FH is transmitted in a slot to which the terminal applies TA, the SCS of SRS-pos-FH can be followed, and if both data and SRS-pos-FH are transmitted in the slot, the SCS of the signal/channel transmitted first can be followed. As a specific example, if the terminal is configured to sequentially perform data transmission and SRS-pos-FH transmission in a slot to which the terminal applies TA, the SCS of the active UL BWP can be followed to determine the TA application value.

상기 option 3의 제안 방식은 독립적으로 적용되거나 option 3-1의 제안 방식과 결합되어 적용될 수 있으며, option 3-1은 독립적으로 적용되지 않을 수 있다.The proposed method of option 3 above can be applied independently or in combination with the proposed method of option 3-1, and option 3-1 may not be applied independently.

상기 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, 단말의 실제 전송에 해당하는 numerology에 맞게 timing adjustment를 할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above proposed method is applied, there may be an advantage in that timing adjustment can be made according to the numerology corresponding to the actual transmission of the terminal.

SRS-pos-FH resource의 주파수 호핑 동작을 지원하기 위하여 상위 노드 (e.g. 기지국 또는 location server)는 SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW 정보들을 결정하고 higher layer signal (e.g. RRC 또는 LPP) 혹은 dynamic 지시 신호를 통해 제공할 수 있다. 이후 기지국은 MAC CE를 통해 TA 동작을 지시할 수 있으며, 해당 TA를 지시된 slot과 TA 동작 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW의 일부 혹은 전부를 설정한 경우 상기 option(s)에 따라 단말에 설정한 UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP 등을 고려하여 단말에게 제공한 TA command 정보의 SCS를 결정할 수 있으며 이에 따라 단말의 TA 적용 slot과 value를 기대할 수 있다. 단말은 기지국으로부터 TA 적용 지시 정보를 수신한 후, 해당 TA를 지시된 slot과 TA 동작 적용 대상 slot을 포함한 사이 slot 구간에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW의 일부 혹은 전부를 설정한 경우 상기 option(s)에 따라 단말에 설정한 UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP 등을 고려하여 TA 적용 slot과 value를 결정하고 이에 따라 TA를 적용할 수 있다. In order to support the frequency hopping operation of SRS-pos-FH resource, an upper node (e.g. a base station or a location server) can determine SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW information and provide it through a higher layer signal (e.g. RRC or LPP) or a dynamic indication signal. Thereafter, the base station can instruct TA operation through MAC CE, and if some or all of SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set in the slot section between the instructed slot and the slot to which the TA operation is applied, the SCS of the TA command information provided to the terminal can be determined by considering the UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP, etc. set in the terminal according to the above option(s), and the TA application slot and value of the terminal can be expected accordingly. After the terminal receives TA application instruction information from the base station, if the terminal sets part or all of the SRS-pos-FH / UTW in the slot section between the indicated slot and the TA operation application target slot, the terminal may determine the TA application slot and value by considering the UL/DL BWP, SRS-pos-FH / UTW, active BWP, etc. set in the terminal according to the above option(s), and apply the TA accordingly.

[제안 2] SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간 내 slot에 대한 Timing adjustment 동작[Proposal 2] Timing adjustment operation for slots within the interval where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set

본 개시에서는 TA가 적용될 slot이 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간이나 UTW가 설정된 slot 구간 내에 있는 slot인 경우의 단말의 Timing adjustment 동작 방식을 제안한다. In this disclosure, we propose a timing adjustment operation method of a terminal when a slot to which TA is applied is a slot within a section in which SRS-pos-FH transmission is set or a slot section in which UTW is set.

[제안 2-1] TA 적용을 미루는 방법[Proposal 2-1] How to postpone TA application

상기 제안된 TA가 적용될 slot이 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간이나 UTW가 설정된 slot 구간 내에 있는 slot인 경우의 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식으로, TA의 적용을 미루는 방법을 고려할 수 있다. In the case where the slot to which the above-mentioned proposed TA is applied is a slot within a section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set or a slot section where UTW is set, a method of postponing the application of TA can be considered as a timing adjustment operation method of the terminal.

예를 들어, 도 16을 참조하면 TA가 적용될 제1 슬롯(slot n+k+1)에 SRS-pos-FH 전송(1601)이 설정된 경우(혹은 제1 슬롯이 UTW가 설정된 slot 구간 내에 있는 slot인 경우), 단말은 TA의 적용을 제1 슬롯이 아니라 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯으로 미룰 수 있다.For example, referring to FIG. 16, if SRS-pos-FH transmission (1601) is set for the first slot (slot n+k+1) to which TA is to be applied (or if the first slot is a slot within the slot section in which UTW is set), the terminal can postpone the application of TA to the second slot located after the first slot.

적용을 미루는 TA의 종류와 적용을 미루는 TA의 적용 위치 각각에 대해 제안 2-1-1, 제안 2-1-2로 나누어 기술한다.The types of TA that postpones application and the application locations of TA that postpones application are described separately in Proposals 2-1-1 and 2-1-2.

[제안 2-1-1] 적용을 미루는 TA 종류[Proposal 2-1-1] Types of TA that postpone application

단말의 Timing adjustment 동작은 기지국의 MAC CE 혹은 RAR를 통한 TA command value의 지시로 이루어지는 timing adjustment 동작과 단말 자체적으로 단말과 참조 타이밍 간의 전송 타이밍 오차(transmission timing error)의 임계치 비교를 통해 이루어지는 gradual timing adjustment 동작으로 나누어질 수 있다. The timing adjustment operation of the terminal can be divided into a timing adjustment operation performed by the instruction of the TA command value through the MAC CE or RAR of the base station and a gradual timing adjustment operation performed by the terminal itself through a threshold comparison of the transmission timing error between the terminal and the reference timing.

상기 제안된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작을 미루는 방식으로 기지국이 지시한 TA와 단말의 자체적 TA의 적용을 모두 미루는 방식과 기지국이 지시한 TA는 미루지 않고 단말의 자체적 TA의 적용만을 미루는 방식을 고려할 수 있다. 각각에 대해 option 1, option 2로 나누어 기술한다.As a way to postpone the timing adjustment operation of the terminal proposed above, a method of postponing both the application of the TA indicated by the base station and the application of the terminal's own TA can be considered, and a method of postponing only the application of the terminal's own TA without postponing the TA indicated by the base station can be considered. Each of these is described separately as option 1 and option 2.

(1) Option 1. 기지국이 지시한 TA와 단말의 자체적 TA의 적용을 모두 미루는 방식(1) Option 1. Method of postponing the application of both the TA indicated by the base station and the terminal's own TA.

단말이 TA를 적용하도록 기대되는 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW가 설정된 경우, 단말은 해당 slot에서 기지국이 지시한 TA와 단말의 자체적 TA의 적용을 모두 수행하지 않도록 정할 수 있으며, TA 적용 시점을 미루도록 정할 수 있다. 일례로 [제안 2-1-2]에 의해 정해진 slot 위치로 TA의 적용을 미룰 수 있다. If SRS-pos-FH/UTW is set for a slot where the terminal is expected to apply TA, the terminal may decide not to perform application of both the TA indicated by the base station and its own TA in the slot, and may decide to postpone the TA application time. For example, the application of TA may be postponed to a slot position determined by [Proposal 2-1-2].

만약 SRS-pos-FH이 수행되는 과정에서 hop 간에 TA값이 상이하게 적용될 경우 serving cell을 제외한 나머지 neighbor cell들에서는 해당 TA adjustment에 대한 정보를 인지하지 못하여 수신 timing의 측정에 오류가 발생될 수 있다. 상기 option 1 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간 내에서 TA 변경이 적용된 SRS-pos-FH의 전송이 완전히 기대되지 않으므로 측위 정확도 성능을 보장할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다.If the TA value is applied differently between hops during the process of performing SRS-pos-FH, neighboring cells other than the serving cell may not recognize the information about the TA adjustment, which may cause errors in measuring the reception timing. If the proposed method of option 1 is applied, there may be an advantage in that the positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed because the transmission of SRS-pos-FH with TA change applied is not completely expected within the section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set.

(2) Option 2. 기지국이 지시한 TA는 그대로 동작, 단말의 자체적 TA는 미루는 방식(2) Option 2. The TA instructed by the base station operates as is, and the terminal's own TA is postponed.

단말이 TA를 적용하도록 기대되는 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW가 설정되었을 때, 해당 TA가 단말이 임계치 비교를 통해 자체적으로 TA를 적용하도록 판단한 경우, 해당 TA의 적용 시점은 미루고 (일례로 [제안 2-1-2]에 의해 정해진 slot 위치로 미룰 수 있음), 해당 TA가 기지국으로부터 단말에 지시된 경우, 사전에 결정된 규칙에 따라 정해진 slot의 위치에서 TA adjustment를 수행하도록 정할 수 있다.(일례로 [제안 1-1]에 의해 결정된 slot 위치에서 [제안 1-2]에 의해 결정된 TA value 만큼의 timing adjustment을 수행)이 때, 기지국이 지시한 TA가 적용될 slot이 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간 내에 있는 slot인 경우 추가로 [제안 2-2]의 방법을 따를 수 있다. When SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for a slot where a terminal is expected to apply TA, if the TA determines that the terminal should apply TA on its own through threshold comparison, the timing of applying the TA may be postponed (for example, it may be postponed to a slot position determined by [Proposal 2-1-2]), and if the TA is indicated to the terminal from the base station, it may be determined to perform TA adjustment at a slot position determined according to a pre-determined rule (for example, performing timing adjustment equivalent to the TA value determined by [Proposal 1-2] at the slot position determined by [Proposal 1-1]). In this case, if the slot to which the TA indicated by the base station is to be applied is a slot within a section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set, the method of [Proposal 2-2] may be additionally followed.

상기 option 2 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW가 설정된 구간에 대해서도 기지국이 TA를 지시할 수 있으므로 단말의 UL 송신 타이밍 조정이 미뤄지지 않을 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. 동시에 serving cell이 인지하지 못하는 단말의 자체적인 TA 동작을 방지하여 serving cell 측면에서 SRS-pos-FH 수신 성능이 저하되는 현상을 방지할 수 있다. If the above option 2 proposal method is applied, there may be an advantage in that the UL transmission timing adjustment of the terminal may not be delayed because the base station can instruct TA for the section where SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW are set. At the same time, the phenomenon of the SRS-pos-FH reception performance degradation on the serving cell side can be prevented by preventing the terminal's own TA operation that the serving cell does not recognize.

[제안 2-1-2] 적용을 미루는 TA의 적용 위치 [Proposal 2-1-2] Application location of TA that postpones application

본 개시에서는 TA가 적용될 slot이 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간이나 UTW가 설정된 slot 구간 내에 있는 slot인 경우의 단말의 Timing adjustment 동작 방식을 제안한다.In this disclosure, we propose a timing adjustment operation method of a terminal when a slot to which TA is applied is a slot within a section in which SRS-pos-FH transmission is set or a slot section in which UTW is set.

상기 제안된 SRS-pos-FH 그리고/혹은 UTW가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, 지시된 TA 적용 동작을 특정 slot 위치로 미루는 방식(들)이 제안될 수 있다. 특정 slot 위치는 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot, 특정 조건을 만족하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하는 가장 빠른 slot, UTW가 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot, SRS-pos-FH가 실제 전송되지 않는 가장 빠른 UL slot으로 고려될 수 있다. 각각에 대해 option 1, option 2, option 3, option 4로 나누어 기술한다. For the timing adjustment operation of the terminal instructed to apply TA to the slot where the above-mentioned SRS-pos-FH and/or UTW is configured, a method(s) for postponing the instructed TA application operation to a specific slot position can be proposed. The specific slot position can be considered as the next slot of the last slot of the slot section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is configured, the earliest slot where there is a hop-to-hop time interval satisfying a specific condition, the next slot of the last slot of the slot section where UTW is configured, and the earliest UL slot where SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted. Each of these is described as option 1, option 2, option 3, and option 4, respectively.

(1) Option 1. SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot으로 미루는 방식(1) Option 1. Method of postponing SRS-pos-FH transmission to the next slot after the last slot in the set slot section.

상기 제안된 SRS-pos-FH가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, 지시된 TA 적용 동작을 SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot으로 미루는 방식이 제안될 수 있다.For the timing adjustment operation method of a terminal instructed to apply TA to a slot where the above-mentioned proposed SRS-pos-FH is set, a method can be proposed to postpone the instructed TA application operation to the slot following the last slot of the slot section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set.

상기 Option 1 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 구간 내에 TA 적용이 완전히 기대되지 않으므로 측위 정확도 성능을 보장할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above Option 1 proposal method is applied, there may be an advantage in that positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed because TA application is not fully expected within the section where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set.

(2) Option 2. 특정 조건을 만족하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하는 가장 빠른 slot으로 미루는 방식(2) Option 2. A method of postponing to the fastest slot where there is a time interval between hops that satisfies certain conditions.

상기 제안된 SRS-pos-FH가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, '특정 조건'에 해당하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하는 경우, 지시된 TA 적용 동작을 해당 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하는 가장 빠른 slot으로 TA 동작을 미룰 수 있다. '특정 조건'에 해당하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하지 않는 경우, 다른 option으로 동작할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 slot에 설정된 SRS-pos-FH의 홉 간 간격 중 "지시된 TA를 적용하고 난 후의 홉 간 간격이 요구 홉 간 간격 이상"을 만족하는 홉 간 간격이 TA 적용을 지시된 slot의 2 slot 뒤에 설정되어 있다면 해당 slot으로 TA 동작을 미룰 수 있다. 상기 제안 방식의 조건을 계산하기 위해 상기 제안된 [제안 1-1] 혹은 [제안 1-2]의 방식에 따라 SCS를 고려할 수 있다. For the timing adjustment operation method of a terminal instructed to apply TA to a slot where the above-mentioned SRS-pos-FH is set, if there is a hop-to-hop time interval corresponding to a 'specific condition', the instructed TA application operation can be postponed to the earliest slot where the corresponding hop-to-hop time interval exists. If there is no hop-to-hop time interval corresponding to the 'specific condition', it can operate with another option. As a specific example, if a hop-to-hop interval that satisfies "the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA is greater than or equal to the required hop-to-hop interval" among the hop-to-hop intervals of SRS-pos-FH set in the slot where the terminal is instructed to apply TA is set 2 slots after the slot where TA application is instructed, the TA operation can be postponed to the corresponding slot. In order to calculate the condition of the above-mentioned proposed method, SCS can be considered according to the method of the above-mentioned [Proposal 1-1] or [Proposal 1-2].

상기 Option 2 제안 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, SRS-pos-FH resource의 symbol drop을 방지하면서도 TA적용을 최대한 앞당길 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above Option 2 proposal method is applied, there may be an advantage of being able to bring forward the application of TA as much as possible while preventing symbol drop of SRS-pos-FH resource.

(3) Option 3. UTW가 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot으로 미루는 방식(3) Option 3. Method of postponing to the next slot of the last slot in the slot section where UTW is set

상기 제안된 UTW가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, 지시된 TA 적용 동작을 UTW 전송이 설정된 slot 구간의 마지막 slot의 다음 slot으로 미루는 방식이 제안될 수 있다. For the timing adjustment operation method of a terminal instructed to apply TA to a slot in which the above-mentioned proposed UTW is set, a method can be proposed in which the instructed TA application operation is postponed to the slot following the last slot of the slot section in which UTW transmission is set.

상기 Option 3 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, UTW가 설정된 구간 내에 TA 적용이 완전히 기대되지 않으므로 측위 정확도 성능을 보장할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above Option 3 proposal method is applied, there may be an advantage in that positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed because TA application is not fully expected within the section where UTW is set.

(4) Option 4. SRS-pos-FH가 실제 전송되지 않는 가장 빠른 UL slot으로 미루는 방식(4) Option 4. SRS-pos-FH is postponed to the fastest UL slot where it is not actually transmitted.

상기 제안된 UTW가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, 지시된 TA adjustment가 수행되는 slot 이후에 등장하는 UL slot 중 SRS-pos-FH가 실제 전송되지 않는 가장 빠른 UL slot을 선택하는 방법이 사용될 수 있다. 이 때 SRS-pos-FH가 실제 전송되지 않는 가장 빠른 UL slot은 만약 해당 SRS-pos-FH가 다른 UL signal/channel과 collision이 발생되지 않는 경우 설정/지시된 SRS-pos-FH의 전송이 완료된 다음 slot을 의미할 수 있으며, 만약 다른 UL signal/channel과 collision이 발생된 경우 SRS-pos-FH이 dropping rule에 의하여 실제 전송되지 않으면서 다른 signal/channel의 전송이 수행되는 slot의 위치로 정할 수 있다. For the timing adjustment operation method of the terminal instructed to apply TA to the slot where the proposed UTW is set, a method of selecting the fastest UL slot where SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted among the UL slots appearing after the slot where the instructed TA adjustment is performed can be used. At this time, the fastest UL slot where SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted can mean the slot after transmission of the set/instructed SRS-pos-FH is completed if the corresponding SRS-pos-FH does not collide with another UL signal/channel, and if a collision occurs with another UL signal/channel, the position of the slot where transmission of another signal/channel is performed while the SRS-pos-FH is not actually transmitted by the dropping rule can be determined.

Option 4가 적용될 때, collision 발생 이후 SRS-pos-FH의 남아 있는 hop들이 전송될 수 있는 경우, 단말은 SRS-pos-FH의 남아 있는 hop들의 전송과 collision 이전에 전송된 SRS-pos-FH의 hop들의 전송 간에 TA를 동일하게 적용하도록 (i.e. TA adjustment 이전의 TA 값으로 돌아가도록) 정할 수도 있다. 이는 SRS-pos-FH을 구성하는 hop들 간에 TA 값을 align하여 기지국의 검출 accuracy를 향상하기 위한 목적일 수 있다. 이후, SRS-pos-FH의 전송이 모두 완료된 이후, 단말은 option 1의 동작과 같이 지시된 TA adjustment를 다시 적용하여 UL 전송을 수행하도록 정할 수 있다. When Option 4 is applied, if the remaining hops of SRS-pos-FH can be transmitted after a collision occurs, the UE may decide to apply the same TA between the transmission of the remaining hops of SRS-pos-FH and the transmission of the hops of SRS-pos-FH transmitted before the collision (i.e., to return to the TA value before TA adjustment). This may be for the purpose of aligning the TA values between the hops constituting the SRS-pos-FH to improve the detection accuracy of the base station. Afterwards, after all transmissions of SRS-pos-FH are completed, the UE may decide to perform UL transmission by reapplying the indicated TA adjustment as in the operation of Option 1.

상기 제안된 [제안 2-1-2]의 option들은 일부 혹은 전부가 적용될 수 있으며, 각 option들의 우선순위로 동작이 결정될 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말에 지시된 TA를 적용할 slot에 SRS-pos-FH과 UTW가 설정된 경우, 상기 option 3 제안 방식을 적용할 수 있으며, 단말에 지시된 TA를 적용할 slot에 SRS-pos-FH가 설정되고 UTW는 설정되지 않은 경우, 상기 option 1 제안 방식을 적용할 수 있다. Some or all of the options of the above-mentioned proposed [Proposal 2-1-2] may be applied, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option. As a specific example, if SRS-pos-FH and UTW are set in a slot to which the TA indicated to the terminal is to be applied, the above-mentioned proposed method of option 3 may be applied, and if SRS-pos-FH is set in a slot to which the TA indicated to the terminal is to be applied and UTW is not set, the above-mentioned proposed method of option 1 may be applied.

상기 [제안 2-1] 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, TA 적용이 SRS-pos FH 동작 중간에 일어나지 않아, SRS-pos FH의 일부 symbol 혹은 hop의 drop이 발생하지 않으므로 측위 정확도 성능을 보장할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above [Proposal 2-1] proposed method is applied, there may be an advantage in that positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed because TA application does not occur in the middle of the SRS-pos FH operation, and therefore some symbols or hops of SRS-pos FH are not dropped.

SRS-pos-FH resource의 주파수 호핑 동작을 지원하기 위하여 상위 노드 (e.g. 기지국 또는 location server)는 SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW 정보들을 결정하고 higher layer signal (e.g. RRC 또는 LPP) 혹은 dynamic 지시 신호를 통해 제공할 수 있다. 이후 기지국은 MAC CE를 통해 TA 동작을 지시할 수 있으며, 해당 TA 동작 적용 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW를 설정한 경우 단말에게 제공한 TA command 정보와 상기 option(s)에 따른 TA 적용 동작을 미루는 방식을 고려하여 SRS-pos-FH resource와 다른 신호/채널의 수신을 기대할 수 있다. 단말은 기지국으로부터 TA 적용 지시 정보를 수신한 후, 해당 TA 동작 적용 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW가 설정된 경우, 상기 option(s)에 따라 지시된 TA 동작을 해당 위치에서 적용할 수 있다. In order to support the frequency hopping operation of the SRS-pos-FH resource, the upper node (e.g. the base station or the location server) can determine the SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW information and provide it through a higher layer signal (e.g. RRC or LPP) or a dynamic indication signal. After that, the base station can instruct a TA operation through MAC CE, and if the SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can expect reception of a signal/channel different from the SRS-pos-FH resource by considering the TA command information provided to the terminal and the method of postponing the TA application operation according to the option(s). After the terminal receives the TA application indication information from the base station, if the SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can apply the TA operation indicated by the option(s) at the corresponding location.

[제안 2-2] SRS-pos-FH 전송이 설정된 slot에 TA 적용하는 방법[Proposal 2-2] How to apply TA to slots where SRS-pos-FH transmission is set

[제안 2-2-1] TA 적용 slot 내 TA 적용 위치를 제한하는 방식[Proposal 2-2-1] Method of limiting the TA application location within the TA application slot

상기 제안된 [제안 1-1]에 의해 결정된 TA 적용 slot 내에 SRS-pos-FH의 전송이 설정된 경우, 불필요한 SRS-pos-FH symbol drop을 방지하고, drop 시 기지국이 drop된 symbol 위치를 알게 하기 위해 TA 적용 위치를 제한하는 방식이 제안될 수 있다. 상기 제안 방식으로는 TA 적용 slot 내 symbol들에 low priority를 부여하는 방식과 TA 적용 slot 내에 특정 조건에 해당하는 홉 간 time gap이 존재하는 경우 해당 time gap 내 symbol(s)부터 TA적용하는 방식이 고려될 수 있다. 각각에 대해 option 1, option 2로 나누어 기술한다. In case that transmission of SRS-pos-FH is set within the TA application slot determined by the above-mentioned proposed [Proposal 1-1], a method for limiting the TA application position may be proposed to prevent unnecessary SRS-pos-FH symbol drop and to allow the base station to know the position of the dropped symbol when it is dropped. As the above-mentioned proposed method, a method of granting low priority to symbols within the TA application slot and a method of applying TA from the symbol(s) within a time gap that exists between hops corresponding to a specific condition within the TA application slot may be considered. Each of these is described separately as option 1 and option 2.

(1) Option 1. TA 적용 slot 내 symbol들에 low priority를 부여하는 방식(1) Option 1. Method of giving low priority to symbols in TA applied slots

TA 적용 slot 내 SRS-pos-FH resource이 설정된 경우 해당 slot을 구성하는 심볼(들)에 다른 slot보다 낮은 우선순위를 부여하고, 해당 심볼들 간에 우선순위를 심볼 인덱스의 오름차순/내림차순으로 부여할 수 있다. 상기 우선순위는 TA를 적용해야 할 때 우선순위가 낮은 symbol부터 적용하는 것을 의미할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말은 기지국으로부터 TA 적용을 지시받은 slot 내에 설정된 SRS-pos-FH가 존재하는 경우, 해당 slot 내 가장 뒤 (혹은 앞)에 있는 symbol부터 TA를 적용할 수 있다. 그리고/또는, 해당 slot을 구성하는 심볼(들) 중 resource가 설정되지 않은 심볼(들)에 SRS-pos-FH resource가 설정된 심볼(들)보다 낮은 우선순위를 부여할 수 있다. If an SRS-pos-FH resource is set in a TA application slot, a lower priority can be given to the symbol(s) composing the slot than to other slots, and priorities can be given among the symbols in ascending/descending order of symbol index. The above priority can mean that when TA is to be applied, it is applied starting from a symbol with a lower priority. As a specific example, if there is an SRS-pos-FH set in a slot to which the base station instructed TA application, the terminal can apply the TA starting from the symbol located at the backmost (or frontmost) in the slot. And/or, among the symbol(s) composing the slot, a lower priority can be given to the symbol(s) for which the resource is not set than to the symbol(s) for which the SRS-pos-FH resource is set.

상기 제안된 option 1 방식이 적용되는 경우, TA 적용 slot 내 SRS-pos-FH resource의 홉 간 간격(들) 중 TA가 적용되는 홉 간 간격의 위치가 결정되므로, TA 적용에 따른 SRS-pos-FH resource의 drop이 발생하는 경우 기지국이 drop된 SRS symbol의 위치를 정확히 알 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above proposed option 1 method is applied, the position of the hop-to-hop interval to which TA is applied is determined among the hop-to-hop interval(s) of SRS-pos-FH resources within the TA application slot. Therefore, if a drop of SRS-pos-FH resources occurs due to TA application, there may be an advantage in that the base station can accurately know the position of the dropped SRS symbol.

(2) Option 2. TA 적용 slot 내에 특정 조건에 해당하는 홉 간 time gap이 존재하는 경우 해당 time gap 내 symbol(s)부터 TA 적용하는 방식(2) Option 2. If there is a time gap between hops that meets a specific condition within the TA application slot, TA is applied starting from the symbol(s) within that time gap.

상기 제안된 SRS-pos-FH가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, '특정 조건'에 해당하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하는 경우, 지시된 TA 적용 동작을 해당 time gap 내 symbol(s)부터 TA를 적용할 수 있다. '특정 조건'에 해당하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 존재하지 않는 경우, 다른 option으로 동작할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 단말이 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 slot에 설정된 SRS-pos-FH의 홉 간 간격 중 "지시된 TA를 적용하고 난 후의 홉 간 간격이 요구 홉 간 간격 이상"을 만족하는 홉 간 간격이 설정되어 있다면 단말은 해당 홉 사이 symbol(s)부터 TA를 적용할 수 있다. 상기 제안 방식의 조건을 계산하기 위해 상기 제안된 [제안 1-1] 혹은 [제안 1-2]의 방식에 따라 SCS를 고려할 수 있다. For the timing adjustment operation method of a terminal instructed to apply TA to a slot where the above-mentioned SRS-pos-FH is set, if there is a hop-to-hop time gap corresponding to a 'specific condition', the instructed TA application operation can apply TA from symbol(s) within the corresponding time gap. If there is no hop-to-hop time gap corresponding to the 'specific condition', it can operate with another option. As a specific example, if a hop-to-hop interval that satisfies "the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA is greater than or equal to the required hop-to-hop interval" among the hop-to-hop intervals of SRS-pos-FH set in the slot where the terminal is instructed to apply TA is set, the terminal can apply TA from symbol(s) between the corresponding hops. In order to calculate the condition of the above-mentioned proposed method, SCS can be considered according to the method of the above-mentioned [Proposal 1-1] or [Proposal 1-2].

상기 제안된 option 2 방식이 적용되는 경우, 해당 위치에 TA를 적용하여도 요구 홉 간 간격을 만족시킬 수 있으므로 SRS symbol drop을 방지할 수 있고, 이에 따라 측위 정확도 성능을 보장할 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above proposed option 2 method is applied, there may be an advantage in that the SRS symbol drop can be prevented and the positioning accuracy performance can be guaranteed as the required hop-to-hop interval can be satisfied even if TA is applied to the corresponding location.

상기 제안된 [제안 2-2-1]의 option들은 일부 혹은 전부가 적용될 수 있으며, 각 option들의 우선순위로 동작이 결정될 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, 상기 제안된 SRS-pos-FH가 설정된 slot에 TA를 적용하도록 지시된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식을 위해, '특정 조건'에 해당하는 홉 간 시간 간격이 복수 개 존재하는 경우, option 1에 의해 정해진 우선순위에 의해 TA 적용 symbol(s)을 결정할 수 있다. The options of the above proposed [Proposal 2-2-1] may be applied in part or in whole, and the operation may be determined by the priority of each option. As a specific example, for the timing adjustment operation method of a terminal instructed to apply TA to a slot where the above proposed SRS-pos-FH is set, if there are multiple hop-to-hop time intervals corresponding to a 'specific condition', the TA application symbol(s) may be determined by the priority determined by option 1.

[제안 2-2-2] SRS-pos-FH의 요구 홉 간 간격, TA command value에 의한 TA 동작 방식[Proposal 2-2-2] Required hop-to-hop interval of SRS-pos-FH, TA operation method by TA command value

상기 제안된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식으로 TA command value, required switching gap between hops를 따른 동작 방법을 제안할 수 있다. As a timing adjustment operation method of the proposed terminal above, an operation method following the TA command value and required switching gap between hops can be proposed.

상향 링크 SRS-pos 주파수 호핑 동작 시, 홉 간 요구되는 간격(required switching gap between hops)은 기지국이 단말로부터 보고받은 UE capability에 따라 설정하며 절대적인 시간 단위로 설정된다. TA 동작이 요구되는 경우, TA command value는 기지국으로부터 지시받은 MAC CE의 index value에 의해 수식적으로 계산되거나 단말에 자체적으로 조정하는 동작에 의해 결정된다.In uplink SRS-pos frequency hopping operation, the required switching gap between hops is set by the base station according to the UE capability reported by the terminal and is set in absolute time units. When TA operation is required, the TA command value is calculated mathematically by the index value of the MAC CE indicated by the base station or determined by the terminal's own adjustment operation.

상기 제안된 단말의 timing adjustment 동작 방식으로, [제안 1-2]에 따라 결정된 SCS를 기반으로 상기 두 파라미터의 관계에 따른 단말의 동작 방식을 제안할 수 있다. 구체적인 일례로, TA 적용 위치에 대해 "지시된 TA를 적용하고 난 후의 홉 간 간격이 요구 홉 간 간격 이상" 인 경우, 단말은 기지국으로부터 지시받은 혹은 자체적으로 결정한 timing adjustment 동작 수행을 수행하며 이외에 추가적인 동작은 기대되지 않을 수 있다. 한편, "지시된 TA를 적용하고 난 후의 홉 간 간격이 요구 홉 간 간격 미만" 인 경우, 단말은 지시된 TA를 적용하고 난 후의 홉 간 간격과 요구 홉 간 간격의 차이 값을 [제안 1-2]에 따라 결정된 SCS의 symbol level로 floor하여 인접 hop의 SRS symbol(s)를 drop한다. 이 때, drop할 인접 SRS symbol(s)를 결정하는 방식은 timing adjustment 적용 slot 내 SRS symbol에 심볼 인덱스의 오름차순/내림차순으로 priority를 부여하는 방식을 고려할 수 있다. As the timing adjustment operation method of the terminal proposed above, it is possible to propose an operation method of the terminal according to the relationship between the two parameters based on the SCS determined according to [Proposal 1-2]. As a specific example, if "the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA is greater than or equal to the required hop-to-hop interval" for the TA application location, the terminal performs the timing adjustment operation instructed by the base station or determined by itself, and no additional operation may be expected. On the other hand, if "the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA is less than the required hop-to-hop interval", the terminal floors the difference value between the hop-to-hop interval after applying the instructed TA and the required hop-to-hop interval to the symbol level of the SCS determined according to [Proposal 1-2] and drops the SRS symbol(s) of the adjacent hop. At this time, a method of determining the adjacent SRS symbol(s) to be dropped can consider a method of giving priority to the SRS symbols in the timing adjustment application slot in ascending/descending order of symbol index.

timing adjustment 적용 slot 내 SRS symbol에 심볼 인덱스의 오름차순/내림차순으로 priority를 부여하는 방식A method of assigning priority to SRS symbols in the slot to which timing adjustment is applied in ascending/descending order of symbol index.

상기 제안된 조건에 따라 SRS-pos-FH resource의 symbol(s)을 drop해야 할 경우, 해당 slot 내에 설정된 SRS-pos-FH resource의 모든 symbol(s)에 심볼 인덱스의 오름차순/내림차순으로 우선 순위를 부여하는 방식이 제안될 수 있다. In case symbol(s) of SRS-pos-FH resource need to be dropped according to the above proposed condition, a method can be proposed to give priority to all symbol(s) of SRS-pos-FH resource set in the corresponding slot in ascending/descending order of symbol index.

상기 제안 방식이 적용될 경우, 기지국이 TA 적용에 따른 SRS-pos-FH drop 시 drop된 SRS symbol의 위치를 정확히 알 수 있다는 이점이 있을 수 있다. If the above proposed method is applied, there may be an advantage in that the base station can accurately know the location of the dropped SRS symbol when SRS-pos-FH is dropped due to TA application.

SRS-pos-FH resource의 주파수 호핑 동작을 지원하기 위하여 상위 노드 (e.g. 기지국 또는 location server)는 SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW 정보들을 결정하고 higher layer signal (e.g. RRC 또는 LPP) 혹은 dynamic 지시 신호를 통해 제공할 수 있다. 기지국은 MAC CE를 통해 TA 동작을 지시할 수 있으며, 해당 TA 동작 적용 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW를 설정한 경우 단말에게 제공한 TA command 정보와 상기 option(s)에 따라 해당 slot 내에서 TA 적용 동작을 결정하여 SRS-pos-FH resource의 수신을 기대할 수 있다. 단말은 기지국으로부터 TA 적용 지시 정보를 수신한 후, 해당 TA 동작 적용 slot에 SRS-pos-FH / UTW가 설정된 경우, 상기 option(s)에 따라 해당 slot 내에서의 TA 적용 동작을 수행할 수 있으며, 경우에 따라 상기 option(s) 방식에 따라 SRS-pos-FH resource의 송신을 drop 할 수 있다. 기지국은 수신한 SRSp resource를 활용한 measurement를 LMF에게 보고하고 LMF는 해당 measurement를 통해 단말의 위치를 추정할 수 있다.In order to support the frequency hopping operation of SRS-pos-FH resource, an upper node (e.g. a base station or a location server) can determine SRS-pos-FH resource / UTW information and provide it through a higher layer signal (e.g. RRC or LPP) or a dynamic indication signal. The base station can instruct TA operation through MAC CE, and if SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can expect reception of SRS-pos-FH resource by determining TA application operation within the corresponding slot according to TA command information provided to the terminal and the above option(s). After receiving TA application indication information from the base station, if SRS-pos-FH / UTW is set for the corresponding TA operation application slot, the terminal can perform TA application operation within the corresponding slot according to the above option(s), and in some cases, can drop transmission of SRS-pos-FH resource according to the above option(s) method. The base station reports measurements using the received SRSp resources to the LMF, and the LMF can estimate the location of the terminal through the measurements.

도 17은 일 실시예에 따른 단말과 네트워크의 동작을 설명하기 위한 도면이다. 도 17에서 단말은 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말일 수 있으나, 이에 한정되지 않는다.Fig. 17 is a diagram for explaining the operation of a terminal and a network according to one embodiment. In Fig. 17, the terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal, but is not limited thereto.

도 17을 참조하면 단말은 네트워크로부터 적어도 한번 이상의 상위 계층 시그널링을 수신할 수 있다(1705). 상위 계층 시그널링은 단말에 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들을 설정하기 위한 BWP 설정 정보를 포함할 수 있다. BWP 설정 정보는 해당 BWP의 SCS에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들 중 하나가 단말의 active BWP일 수 있다. 상위 계층 시그널링은 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS에 대한 설정 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS에 대한 설정 정보는 SRS 대역에 대한 정보, SRS 주파수 호핑에 대한 정보, SRS 대역 내에서 SRS 송신을 위해서 사용될 SCS에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. SRS 대역은 단말에 설정된 BWP들을 aggregation한 가상의 BW일 수 있으며, 단말은 주파수 호핑에 따라서 RF retuning을 수행하며 SRS를 송신할 수 있다. SRS의 SCS는 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들과는 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 17, the terminal may receive at least one upper layer signaling from the network (1705). The upper layer signaling may include BWP configuration information for configuring one or more BWPs in the terminal. The BWP configuration information may include information on an SCS of the corresponding BWP. One of the one or more BWPs configured in the terminal may be an active BWP of the terminal. The upper layer signaling may include configuration information on an SRS for positioning. The configuration information on the SRS for positioning may include information on an SRS band, information on SRS frequency hopping, and information on an SCS to be used for SRS transmission within the SRS band. The SRS band may be a virtual BW that aggregates BWPs configured in the terminal, and the terminal may perform RF retuning according to frequency hopping and transmit the SRS. The SCS of the SRS may be configured independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs configured in the terminal.

단말은 네트워크로부터 TA command를 수신할 수 있다. TA command는 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 것으로써, RAR (random access response) 또는 TA 명령 MAC(medium access control) CE(control element)를 통해서 수신될 수 있다.The terminal can receive a TA command from the network. The TA command is for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to the uplink transmission of the terminal, and can be received through a RAR (random access response) or a TA command MAC (medium access control) CE (control element).

단말은 수신된 TA command 가 적용되기 시작할 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정할 수 있다(1715). 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스는 제1 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다. 상기 제1 SCS는 상기 SRS의 SCS와 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들 중 가장 작은 SCS일 수 있다. 상기 SRS의 SCS가 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들보다 작은 것에 기반하여, 상기 SRS의 SCS에 기초하여 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스가 결정될 수 있다.The terminal can determine an index of a first slot at which the received TA command will start to be applied (1715). The index of the first slot can be determined based on a first SCS (subcarrier spacing). The first SCS can be a smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCSs of one or more BWPs configured for the terminal. The index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of the one or more BWPs configured for the terminal.

단말은 SRS에 대한 설정 정보에 기초하여 주파수를 호핑하며 포지셔닝을 위한 SRS를 송신할 수 있다(1720). 상기 SRS가 송신되는 동안에는 동일한 TA 값이 유지될 수 있다.The terminal can hop frequencies based on the configuration information for the SRS and transmit an SRS for positioning (1720). The same TA value can be maintained while the SRS is being transmitted.

만약 제1 슬롯이 SRS의 송신 구간에 포함된 경우 단말은 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작할 수 있다 (1725). 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다. 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간이 직후에 위치한 슬롯일 수 있다.If the first slot is included in the transmission section of the SRS, the terminal can start applying the adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot (1725). The second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the transmission section of the SRS. The second slot can be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.

단말은 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신할 수 있다(1730).The terminal can transmit an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value (1730).

도 18는 일 실시예에 따라서 단말에 의해 수행되는 방법의 흐름을 도시한다.FIG. 18 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a terminal according to one embodiment.

도 18을 참조하면 단말은 상기 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 네트워크로부터 수신할 수 있다(1805).Referring to FIG. 18, a terminal can receive a TA command from a network for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal (1805).

단말은 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정할 수 있다(1810).The terminal can determine the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command (1810).

단말은 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신할 수 있다(1815).The terminal can transmit an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value (1815).

상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 송신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 단말은 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작할 수 있다. Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the transmission section of an SRS (sounding reference signal) that is transmitted while hopping frequencies for positioning, the terminal can start applying the above-mentioned adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot.

상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.The above second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the transmission section of the SRS.

상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간이 직후에 위치한 슬롯일 수 있다.The above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS.

단말은 상기 SRS의 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 대한 정보를 포함하는 SRS 설정 정보를 수신할 수 있다.The terminal can receive SRS configuration information including information on SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.

상기 SRS의 SCS는 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP(bandwidth part)들의 SCS들과는 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다.The SCS of the above SRS can be set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal.

상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스는 제1 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.The index of the first slot may be determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing).

상기 제1 SCS는 상기 SRS의 SCS와 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들 중 가장 작은 SCS일 수 있다.The above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.

상기 SRS의 SCS가 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들보다 작은 것에 기반하여, 상기 SRS의 SCS에 기초하여 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스가 결정될 수 있다.Based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of one or more BWPs set for the terminal, the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.

단말은 상기 송신 구간에서 주파수를 호핑하며 상기 SRS를 송신할 수 있다.The terminal can transmit the SRS by frequency hopping in the above transmission section.

상기 SRS가 송신되는 동안에는 동일한 TA 값이 유지될 수 있다.The same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being transmitted.

상기 TA 명령은 RAR (random access response) 또는 TA 명령 MAC(medium access control) CE(control element)를 통해서 수신될 수 있다.The above TA command can be received via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).

상기 단말은 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말일 수 있다.The above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.

도 19는 일 실시예에 따라서 기지국에 의해 수행되는 방법의 흐름을 도시한다.FIG. 19 illustrates a flow of a method performed by a base station according to one embodiment.

도 19를 참조하면 기지국은 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 상기 단말에 송신할 수 있다 (1905).Referring to FIG. 19, a base station can transmit a TA command to a terminal for adjusting a TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal (1905).

기지국은 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정할 수 있다 (1910).The base station can determine the index of the first slot associated with the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command (1910).

기지국은 상기 단말이 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 송신하는 상향링크 신호를 수신할 수 있다 (1915).The base station can receive an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value (1915).

상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 수신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 수신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용이 시작될 수 있다. Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the reception section of an SRS (sounding reference signal) that is received while hopping frequencies for positioning, the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value can start from the second slot located after the first slot.

상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯 들 중에서 선택될 수 있다.The above second slot can be selected from among the slots located after the reception section of the SRS.

상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간이 직후에 위치한 슬롯일 수 있다.The above second slot may be a slot located immediately after the reception section of the SRS.

기지국은 상기 SRS의 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 대한 정보를 포함하는 SRS 설정 정보를 송신할 수 있다.The base station can transmit SRS configuration information including information on the SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the SRS.

상기 SRS의 SCS는 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP(bandwidth part)들의 SCS들과는 독립적으로 설정될 수 있다.The SCS of the above SRS can be set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal.

상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스는 제1 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.The index of the first slot may be determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing).

상기 제1 SCS는 상기 SRS의 SCS와 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들 중 가장 작은 SCS일 수 있다.The above first SCS may be the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs set in the terminal.

상기 SRS의 SCS가 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP들의 SCS들보다 작은 것에 기반하여, 상기 SRS의 SCS에 기초하여 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스가 결정될 수 있다.Based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of one or more BWPs set for the terminal, the index of the first slot can be determined based on the SCS of the SRS.

기지국은 상기 수신 구간에서 주파수를 호핑하며 상기 SRS를 수신할 수 있다.The base station can receive the SRS by hopping frequencies in the above receiving section.

상기 SRS가 수신되는 동안에는 동일한 TA 값이 유지될 수 있다.The same TA value can be maintained while the above SRS is being received.

상기 TA 명령은 RAR (random access response) 또는 TA 명령 MAC(medium access control) CE(control element)를 통해서 송신될 수 있다.The above TA command can be transmitted via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element).

상기 단말은 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말일 수 있다.The above terminal may be a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal.

도 20은 본 실시예에 적용가능한 통신 시스템(1)을 예시한다.Fig. 20 illustrates a communication system (1) applicable to the present embodiment.

도 20을 참조하면, 통신 시스템(1)은 무선 기기, 기지국 및 네트워크를 포함한다. 여기서, 무선 기기는 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR(New RAT), LTE(Long Term Evolution))을 이용하여 통신을 수행하는 기기를 의미하며, 통신/무선/5G 기기로 지칭될 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(100a), 차량(100b-1, 100b-2), XR(eXtended Reality) 기기(100c), 휴대 기기(Hand-held device)(100d), 가전(100e), IoT(Internet of Thing) 기기(100f), AI기기/서버(400)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량은 무선 통신 기능이 구비된 차량, 자율 주행 차량, 차량간 통신을 수행할 수 있는 차량 등을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 차량은 UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)(예, 드론)를 포함할 수 있다. XR 기기는 AR(Augmented Reality)/VR(Virtual Reality)/MR(Mixed Reality) 기기를 포함하며, HMD(Head-Mounted Device), 차량에 구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display), 텔레비전, 스마트폰, 컴퓨터, 웨어러블 디바이스, 가전 기기, 디지털 사이니지(signage), 차량, 로봇 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 휴대 기기는 스마트폰, 스마트패드, 웨어러블 기기(예, 스마트워치, 스마트글래스), 컴퓨터(예, 노트북 등) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 가전은 TV, 냉장고, 세탁기 등을 포함할 수 있다. IoT 기기는 센서, 스마트미터 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 기지국, 네트워크는 무선 기기로도 구현될 수 있으며, 특정 무선 기기(200a)는 다른 무선 기기에게 기지국/네트워크 노드로 동작할 수도 있다.Referring to FIG. 20, the communication system (1) includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network. Here, the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400). For example, the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc. Here, the vehicle may include an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) (e.g., a drone). XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc. Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.). Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc. IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc. For example, base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.

무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)을 통해 네트워크(300)와 연결될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)에는 AI(Artificial Intelligence) 기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 네트워크(300)를 통해 AI 서버(400)와 연결될 수 있다. 네트워크(300)는 3G 네트워크, 4G(예, LTE) 네트워크 또는 5G(예, NR) 네트워크 등을 이용하여 구성될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)/네트워크(300)를 통해 서로 통신할 수도 있지만, 기지국/네트워크를 통하지 않고 직접 통신(e.g. 사이드링크 통신(sidelink communication))할 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 차량들(100b-1, 100b-2)은 직접 통신(e.g. V2V(Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X(Vehicle to everything) communication)을 할 수 있다. 또한, IoT 기기(예, 센서)는 다른 IoT 기기(예, 센서) 또는 다른 무선 기기(100a~100f)와 직접 통신을 할 수 있다.Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300). The network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc. The wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network. For example, vehicles (100b-1, 100b-2) can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication). Also, IoT devices (e.g., sensors) can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).

무선 기기(100a~100f)/기지국(200), 기지국(200)/기지국(200) 간에는 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)이 이뤄질 수 있다. 여기서, 무선 통신/연결은 상향/하향링크 통신(150a)과 사이드링크 통신(150b)(또는, D2D 통신), 기지국간 통신(150c)(e.g. relay, IAB(Integrated Access Backhaul)과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR)을 통해 이뤄질 수 있다. 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)을 통해 무선 기기와 기지국/무선 기기, 기지국과 기지국은 서로 무선 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)은 다양한 물리 채널을 통해 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 본 개시의 다양한 제안들에 기반하여, 무선 신호의 송신/수신을 위한 다양한 구성 정보 설정 과정, 다양한 신호 처리 과정(예, 채널 인코딩/디코딩, 변조/복조, 자원 맵핑/디맵핑 등), 자원 할당 과정 등 중 적어도 일부가 수행될 수 있다.Wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200). Here, the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul). Through the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c), a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other. For example, the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels. To this end, at least some of various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals, various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present disclosure.

도 21은 본 개시에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.FIG. 21 illustrates a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure.

도 21을 참조하면, 제1 무선 기기(100)와 제2 무선 기기(200)는 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 통해 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 여기서, {제1 무선 기기(100), 제2 무선 기기(200)}은 도 21의 {무선 기기(100x), 기지국(200)} 및/또는 {무선 기기(100x), 무선 기기(100x)}에 대응할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 21, the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). Here, {the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200)} can correspond to {the wireless device (100x), the base station (200)} and/or {the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x)} of FIG. 21.

제1 무선 기기(100)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102) 및 하나 이상의 메모리(104)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(106) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108)을 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 및/또는 송수신기(106)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제1 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(106)을 통해 제1 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(102)는 송수신기(106)를 통해 제2 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제2 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(104)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(102)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(102)와 메모리(104)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(108)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 개시의 일 실시예에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.A first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108). The processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106). Additionally, the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104). The memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. Here, the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108). The transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit. In one embodiment of the present disclosure, the wireless device may mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.

제2 무선 기기(200)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(202), 하나 이상의 메모리(204)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 및/또는 송수신기(206)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제3 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(206)를 통해 제3 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(202)는 송수신기(206)를 통해 제4 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제4 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(204)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(202)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(202)와 메모리(204)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다 송수신기(206)는 RF 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 개시의 일 실시예에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.The second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208). The processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204). The memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in the present document. Here, the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208). The transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit. In one embodiment of the present disclosure, the wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.

이하, 무선 기기(100, 200)의 하드웨어 요소에 대해 보다 구체적인 예로 설명한다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 하나 이상의 프로토콜 계층이 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 계층(예, PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP와 같은 기능적 계층)을 구현할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 하나 이상의 PDU(Protocol Data Unit) 및/또는 하나 이상의 SDU(Service Data Unit)를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 메시지, 제어 정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 기능, 절차, 제안 및/또는 방법에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어 정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 포함하는 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 생성하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)에게 제공할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)로부터 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 수신할 수 있고, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어 정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 획득할 수 있다.Hereinafter, more specific examples of hardware elements of the wireless device (100, 200) will be described. Although not limited thereto, one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202). For example, one or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP). One or more processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) comprising PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206). One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.

하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 컨트롤러, 마이크로 컨트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 또는 마이크로 컴퓨터로 지칭될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하드웨어, 펌웨어, 소프트웨어, 또는 이들의 조합에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 일 예로, 하나 이상의 ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit), 하나 이상의 DSP(Digital Signal Processor), 하나 이상의 DSPD(Digital Signal Processing Device), 하나 이상의 PLD(Programmable Logic Device) 또는 하나 이상의 FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Arrays)가 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있고, 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 모듈, 절차, 기능 등을 포함하도록 구현될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 수행하도록 설정된 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함되거나, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)에 저장되어 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 코드, 명령어 및/또는 명령어의 집합 형태로 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있다. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. For example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), one or more Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), one or more Digital Signal Processing Devices (DSPDs), one or more Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) may be included in the one or more processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc. The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.

하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 다양한 형태의 데이터, 신호, 메시지, 정보, 프로그램, 코드, 지시 및/또는 명령을 저장할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 ROM, RAM, EPROM, 플래시 메모리, 하드 드라이브, 레지스터, 캐쉬 메모리, 컴퓨터 판독 저장 매체 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)의 내부 및/또는 외부에 위치할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 유선 또는 무선 연결과 같은 다양한 기술을 통해 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있다.One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.

하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 본 문서의 방법들 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 전송할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 전송하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 수신하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)를 통해 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 송수신하도록 설정될 수 있다. 본 문서에서, 하나 이상의 안테나는 복수의 물리 안테나이거나, 복수의 논리 안테나(예, 안테나 포트)일 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 수신된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리하기 위해, 수신된 무선 신호/채널 등을 RF 밴드 신호에서 베이스밴드 신호로 변환(Convert)할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 베이스밴드 신호에서 RF 밴드 신호로 변환할 수 있다. 이를 위하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 (아날로그) 오실레이터 및/또는 필터를 포함할 수 있다.One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices. One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices. For example, one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals. For example, one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208). In this document, one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202). For this purpose, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.

도 22는 본 개시에 적용 가능한 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다(도 20 참조).Fig. 22 illustrates another example of a wireless device applicable to the present disclosure. The wireless device may be implemented in various forms depending on the use-case/service (see Fig. 20).

도 22를 참조하면, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 도 21의 무선 기기(100,200)에 대응하며, 다양한 요소(element), 성분(component), 유닛/부(unit), 및/또는 모듈(module)로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)를 포함할 수 있다. 통신부는 통신 회로(112) 및 송수신기(들)(114)을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 통신 회로(112)는 도 21의 하나 이상의 프로세서(102,202) 및/또는 하나 이상의 메모리(104,204) 를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송수신기(들)(114)는 도 21의 하나 이상의 송수신기(106,206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108,208)을 포함할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 통신부(110), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)와 전기적으로 연결되며 무선 기기의 제반 동작을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 프로그램/코드/명령/정보에 기반하여 무선 기기의 전기적/기계적 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 정보를 통신부(110)을 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 전송하거나, 통신부(110)를 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로부터 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 수신된 정보를 메모리부(130)에 저장할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 22, the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 21 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules. For example, the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140). The communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114). For example, the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 21. For example, the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 21. The control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device. For example, the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130). In addition, the control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).

추가 요소(140)는 무선 기기의 종류에 따라 다양하게 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 추가 요소(140)는 파워 유닛/배터리, 입출력부(I/O unit), 구동부 및 컴퓨팅부 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(도 21, 100a), 차량(도 21, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR 기기(도 21, 100c), 휴대 기기(도 21, 100d), 가전(도 21, 100e), IoT 기기(도 21, 100f), 디지털 브로드캐스트용 단말, 홀로그램 장치, 공공 안전 장치, MTC 장치, 의료 장치, 핀테크 장치(또는 금융 장치), 보안 장치, 기후/환경 장치, AI 서버/기기(도 21, 400), 기지국(도 21, 200), 네트워크 노드 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 이동 가능하거나 고정된 장소에서 사용될 수 있다.The additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device. For example, the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 21, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 21, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 21, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 21, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 21, 100e), an IoT device (FIG. 21, 100f), a terminal for digital broadcasting, a hologram device, a public safety device, an MTC device, a medical device, a fintech device (or a financial device), a security device, a climate/environmental device, an AI server/device (FIG. 21, 400), a base station (FIG. 21, 200), a network node, etc. Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.

도 22에서 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 다양한 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 전체가 유선 인터페이스를 통해 상호 연결되거나, 적어도 일부가 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내에서 제어부(120)와 통신부(110)는 유선으로 연결되며, 제어부(120)와 제1 유닛(예, 130, 140)은 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 각 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 하나 이상의 요소를 더 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 하나 이상의 프로세서 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 통신 제어 프로세서, 어플리케이션 프로세서(Application processor), ECU(Electronic Control Unit), 그래픽 처리 프로세서, 메모리 제어 프로세서 등의 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로, 메모리부(130)는 RAM(Random Access Memory), DRAM(Dynamic RAM), ROM(Read Only Memory), 플래시 메모리(flash memory), 휘발성 메모리(volatile memory), 비-휘발성 메모리(non-volatile memory) 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다.In FIG. 22, various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110). For example, within the wireless device (100, 200), the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110). In addition, each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphic processing processor, a memory control processor, etc. As another example, the memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.

도 23은 본 개시에 적용 가능한 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다. 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량은 이동형 로봇, 차량, 기차, 유/무인 비행체(Aerial Vehicle, AV), 선박 등으로 구현될 수 있다.Fig. 23 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applicable to the present disclosure. The vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.

도 23을 참조하면, 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)은 안테나부(108), 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 구동부(140a), 전원공급부(140b), 센서부(140c) 및 자율 주행부(140d)를 포함할 수 있다. 안테나부(108)는 통신부(110)의 일부로 구성될 수 있다. 블록 110/130/140a~140d는 각각 도 22의 블록 110/130/140에 대응한다.Referring to FIG. 23, a vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d). The antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110). Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 22, respectively.

통신부(110)는 다른 차량, 기지국(e.g. 기지국, 노변 기지국(Road Side unit) 등), 서버 등의 외부 기기들과 신호(예, 데이터, 제어 신호 등)를 송수신할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)의 요소들을 제어하여 다양한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 ECU(Electronic Control Unit)를 포함할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)을 지상에서 주행하게 할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 엔진, 모터, 파워 트레인, 바퀴, 브레이크, 조향 장치 등을 포함할 수 있다. 전원공급부(140b)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)에게 전원을 공급하며, 유/무선 충전 회로, 배터리 등을 포함할 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보, 사용자 정보 등을 얻을 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 IMU(inertial measurement unit) 센서, 충돌 센서, 휠 센서(wheel sensor), 속도 센서, 경사 센서, 중량 sensing 센서, 헤딩 센서(heading sensor), 포지션 모듈(position module), 차량 전진/후진 센서, 배터리 센서, 연료 센서, 타이어 센서, 스티어링 센서, 온도 센서, 습도 센서, 초음파 센서, 조도 센서, 페달 포지션 센서 등을 포함할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 주행중인 차선을 유지하는 기술, 어댑티브 크루즈 컨트롤과 같이 속도를 자동으로 조절하는 기술, 정해진 경로를 따라 자동으로 주행하는 기술, 목적지가 설정되면 자동으로 경로를 설정하여 주행하는 기술 등을 구현할 수 있다.The communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc. The control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations. The control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit). The drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground. The drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc. The power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc. The sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc. The sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight sensing sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc. The autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.

일 예로, 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 지도 데이터, 교통 정보 데이터 등을 수신할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 획득된 데이터를 기반으로 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 생성할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 드라이빙 플랜에 따라 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)이 자율 주행 경로를 따라 이동하도록 구동부(140a)를 제어할 수 있다(예, 속도/방향 조절). 자율 주행 도중에 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 최신 교통 정보 데이터를 비/주기적으로 획득하며, 주변 차량으로부터 주변 교통 정보 데이터를 획득할 수 있다. 또한, 자율 주행 도중에 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 새로 획득된 데이터/정보에 기반하여 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 갱신할 수 있다. 통신부(110)는 차량 위치, 자율 주행 경로, 드라이빙 플랜 등에 관한 정보를 외부 서버로 전달할 수 있다. 외부 서버는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들로부터 수집된 정보에 기반하여, AI 기술 등을 이용하여 교통 정보 데이터를 미리 예측할 수 있고, 예측된 교통 정보 데이터를 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들에게 제공할 수 있다.For example, the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data. The control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control). During autonomous driving, the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles. In addition, the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information. The communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server. An external server can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to the vehicles or autonomous vehicles.

이상에서 설명된 실시예들은 본 개시의 구성요소들과 특징들이 소정 형태로 결합된 것들이다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 별도의 명시적 언급이 없는 한 선택적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 다른 구성요소나 특징과 결합되지 않은 형태로 실시될 수 있다. 또한, 일부 구성요소들 및/또는 특징들을 결합하여 본 개시의 실시예를 구성하는 것도 가능하다. 본 개시의 실시예들에서 설명되는 동작들의 순서는 변경될 수 있다. 어느 실시예의 일부 구성이나 특징은 다른 실시예에 포함될 수 있고, 또는 다른 실시예의 대응하는 구성 또는 특징과 교체될 수 있다. 특허청구범위에서 명시적인 인용 관계가 있지 않은 청구항들을 결합하여 실시예를 구성하거나 출원 후의 보정에 의해 새로운 청구항으로 포함시킬 수 있다.The embodiments described above are combinations of components and features of the present disclosure in a given form. Each component or feature should be considered optional unless explicitly stated otherwise. Each component or feature may be implemented in a form that is not combined with other components or features. In addition, it is also possible to combine some components and/or features to form an embodiment of the present disclosure. The order of operations described in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment, or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. Claims that do not have an explicit citation relationship in the claims may be combined to form an embodiment, or may be included as a new claim by post-application amendment.

본 개시는 기술적 특징을 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다른 특정한 형태로 구체화될 수 있음은 당업자에게 자명하다. 따라서, 상기의 상세한 설명은 모든 면에서 제한적으로 해석되어서는 아니되고 예시적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 본 개시의 범위는 첨부된 청구항의 합리적 해석에 의해 결정되어야 하고, 본 개시의 등가적 범위 내에서의 모든 변경은 본 개시의 범위에 포함된다.It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the present disclosure may be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the technical features thereof. Accordingly, the above detailed description should not be construed as limiting in all respects but should be considered as illustrative. The scope of the present disclosure should be determined by a reasonable interpretation of the appended claims, and all changes within the equivalent scope of the present disclosure are intended to be included in the scope of the present disclosure.

본 개시는 무선 이동 통신 시스템의 단말기, 기지국, 및/또는 위치 서버 등의 네트워크를 비롯한 다양한 장치에 사용될 수 있다.The present disclosure can be used in various devices including networks such as terminals, base stations, and/or location servers of wireless mobile communication systems.

Claims (15)

단말에 의해 수행되는 방법에 있어서,In a method performed by a terminal, 상기 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 네트워크로부터 수신;Receiving a TA command from the network for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the above terminal; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및Determining the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command; and 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신하는 것을 포함하고, Including transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 송신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 단말은 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작하고, Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the transmission section of the SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted while hopping frequencies for positioning, the terminal starts applying the above-mentioned adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯들 중에서 선택되는, 방법.A method wherein the second slot is selected from among slots located after the transmission section of the SRS. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간이 직후에 위치한 슬롯인, 방법.A method wherein the second slot is a slot located immediately after the transmission section of the SRS. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 SRS의 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 대한 정보를 포함하는 SRS 설정 정보를 수신하는 것을 더 포함하고,Further comprising receiving SRS configuration information including information on SCS (subcarrier spacing) of the above SRS, 상기 SRS의 SCS는 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP(bandwidth part)들의 SCS들과는 독립적으로 설정되는, 방법.A method wherein the SCS of the above SRS is set independently of the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스는 제1 SCS (subcarrier spacing)에 기초하여 결정되고,The index of the first slot is determined based on the first SCS (subcarrier spacing), 상기 제1 SCS는 상기 SRS의 SCS와 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP (bandwidth part)들의 SCS들 중 가장 작은 SCS인, 방법.A method wherein the first SCS is the smallest SCS among the SCS of the SRS and the SCS of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set in the terminal. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 SRS의 SCS가 상기 단말에 설정된 하나 또는 둘 이상의 BWP(bandwidth part)들의 SCS들보다 작은 것에 기반하여, 상기 SRS의 SCS에 기초하여 상기 제1 슬롯의 인덱스가 결정되는, 방법.A method wherein the index of the first slot is determined based on the SCS of the SRS, based on the SCS of the SRS being smaller than the SCSs of one or more BWPs (bandwidth parts) set for the terminal. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 송신 구간에서 주파수를 호핑하며 상기 SRS를 송신하는 것을 더 포함하고,Further comprising transmitting the SRS while hopping frequencies in the above transmission interval, 상기 SRS가 송신되는 동안에는 동일한 TA 값이 유지되는, 방법.A method wherein the same TA value is maintained while the above SRS is transmitted. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 TA 명령은 RAR (random access response) 또는 TA 명령 MAC(medium access control) CE(control element)를 통해서 수신되는, 방법.A method in which the above TA command is received via a random access response (RAR) or a TA command medium access control (MAC) CE (control element). 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 단말은 RedCap (reduced capability) 단말인, 방법.A method wherein the above terminal is a RedCap (reduced capability) terminal. 제1 항에 기재된 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 비-일시적(non-transitory) 기록 매체.A computer-readable, non-transitory recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described in claim 1. 기기에 있어서,In the device, 명령어들을 저장하도록 구성된 메모리; 및a memory configured to store instructions; and 상기 명령어들을 실행함으로써 동작들을 수행하도록 구성된 프로세서를 포함하고,A processor configured to perform operations by executing the above instructions, 상기 프로세서의 동작들은: The operations of the above processor are: 상기 기기의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 네트워크로부터 수신;Receiving a TA command from the network for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the above device; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및Determining the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command; and 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 상향링크 신호를 송신하는 것을 포함하고, Including transmitting an uplink signal based on the adjusted TA value, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 송신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 송신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 기기는 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용을 시작하고, Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the transmission section of the SRS (sounding reference signal) transmitted by hopping the frequency for positioning, the device starts applying the above-mentioned adjusted TA value from the second slot located after the first slot, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 송신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯들 중에서 선택되는, 기기.The device wherein the second slot is selected from among the slots located after the transmission section of the SRS. 제10 항에 있어서,In Article 10, 상기 기기는 무선 통신 시스템에서 동작하는 단말을 제어하기 위한 프로세싱 기기인, 기기.The above device is a processing device for controlling a terminal operating in a wireless communication system. 제10 항에 있어서,In Article 10, 상기 기기는 송수신기를 더 포함하고,The above device further comprises a transceiver, 상기 기기는 무선 통신 시스템에서 동작하는 단말인, 기기.The above device is a terminal operating in a wireless communication system. 기지국에 의해 수행되는 방법에 있어서,In a method performed by a base station, 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 상기 단말에 송신;Transmitting a TA command to the terminal for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및Determining the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command; and 상기 단말이 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 송신하는 상향링크 신호를 수신하는 것을 포함하고, Including receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 수신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 수신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용이 시작되고, Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the reception section of the SRS (sounding reference signal) that is received while hopping frequencies for positioning, the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value starts from the second slot located after the first slot, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯들 중에서 선택되는, 방법.A method wherein the second slot is selected from among slots located after the reception section of the SRS. 제13 항에 기재된 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 비-일시적(non-transitory) 기록 매체.A computer-readable, non-transitory recording medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method described in claim 13. 기지국에 있어서,At the base station, 명령어들을 저장하도록 구성된 메모리; 및a memory configured to store instructions; and 상기 명령어들을 실행함으로써 동작들을 수행하도록 구성된 프로세서를 포함하고,A processor configured to perform operations by executing the above instructions, 상기 프로세서의 동작들은: The operations of the above processor are: 단말의 상향링크 송신과 관련된 TA (timing advance) 값의 조절을 위한 TA 명령(command)을 상기 단말에 송신;Transmitting a TA command to the terminal for adjusting the TA (timing advance) value related to uplink transmission of the terminal; 상기 TA 명령에 기초하여 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯의 인덱스를 결정; 및Determining the index of the first slot related to the application of the adjusted TA value based on the above TA command; and 상기 단말이 상기 조절된 TA 값에 기초하여 송신하는 상향링크 신호를 수신하는 것을 포함하고, Including receiving an uplink signal transmitted by the terminal based on the adjusted TA value, 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용과 관련된 제1 슬롯이 포지셔닝을 위하여 주파수를 호핑하며 수신되는 SRS(sounding reference signal)의 수신 구간에 포함된 것에 기반하여, 상기 제1 슬롯 이후에 위치한 제2 슬롯부터 상기 조절된 TA 값의 적용이 시작되고, Based on the fact that the first slot related to the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value is included in the reception section of the SRS (sounding reference signal) that is received while hopping frequencies for positioning, the application of the above-mentioned adjusted TA value starts from the second slot located after the first slot, 상기 제2 슬롯은 상기 SRS의 수신 구간 이후에 위치한 슬롯들 중에서 선택되는, 기지국.A base station, wherein the second slot is selected from among slots located after the reception section of the SRS.
PCT/KR2024/016952 2023-11-02 2024-10-31 Method performed by terminal or base station in wireless communication system, and device therefor Pending WO2025095641A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202363547126P 2023-11-02 2023-11-02
US63/547,126 2023-11-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025095641A1 true WO2025095641A1 (en) 2025-05-08

Family

ID=95581279

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/016952 Pending WO2025095641A1 (en) 2023-11-02 2024-10-31 Method performed by terminal or base station in wireless communication system, and device therefor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025095641A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190053183A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Kyungmin Park Timing Advance Group Configuration
KR20190017707A (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-20 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for adjusting uplink timing in a wireless communication system
US20200229016A1 (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-07-16 Qualcomm Incorporated Round trip time (rtt) positioning and timing advance (ta) command with user equipment rx tx measurement reporting

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190053183A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Kyungmin Park Timing Advance Group Configuration
KR20190017707A (en) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-20 엘지전자 주식회사 Method and apparatus for adjusting uplink timing in a wireless communication system
US20200229016A1 (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-07-16 Qualcomm Incorporated Round trip time (rtt) positioning and timing advance (ta) command with user equipment rx tx measurement reporting

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; NR; Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification (Release 17)", 3GPP STANDARD; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION; 3GPP TS 38.321, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG2, no. V17.6.0, 27 September 2023 (2023-09-27), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, pages 1 - 253, XP052512568 *
SAMSUNG: "Introduction of non-terrestrial network operation in NR", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2112447, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20211111 - 20211119, 8 November 2021 (2021-11-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052082636 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022059876A1 (en) Network-based positioning method using relay in nr-v2x system, and device therefor
WO2020145727A1 (en) Positioning method in wireless communication system, and device supporting same
WO2020167057A1 (en) Method for positioning in wireless communication system, and device for supporting same
WO2021040494A1 (en) Method for user equipment in wireless communication system
WO2020159339A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus supporting same
WO2021034043A1 (en) Method for controlling transmission power of sounding reference signal (srs) by terminal in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2021101182A1 (en) Method of transmitting control information for sidelink positioning, and apparatus therefor
WO2021075884A1 (en) Positioning method in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2020256365A1 (en) Sidelink tdoa-based positioning
WO2021029759A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving signal in wireless communication system and device supporting same
WO2020167023A1 (en) Positioning method in wireless communication system, and device supporting same
WO2021194274A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus supporting same
WO2022080992A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2022080817A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2022030948A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system and apparatus supporting same
WO2022080818A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2021162515A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus for supporting same
WO2022005254A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2021172963A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2022245188A1 (en) Method and apparatus for measuring position in nr v2x
WO2021194206A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2023014203A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving signal in wireless communication system, and apparatus supporting same
WO2024172600A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting/receiving wireless signal in wireless communication system
WO2024172603A1 (en) Method and device for transmitting/receiving wireless signal in wireless communication system
WO2024210514A1 (en) Method and device for measuring time difference on basis of reference signal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24886313

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1